Samsung Clx 6210fx User Manual

CLX-6200 Series  
CLX-6240 Series  
Multi Functional Printer  
User’s Guide  
imagine the possibilities  
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.  
To receive a more complete service, please  
register your product at  
FEATURES BY MODELS  
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.  
Basic features of this machine include:  
FEATURES  
CLX-6200ND  
CLX-6200FX  
CLX-6210FX  
CLX-6240FX  
USB 2.0  
 
 
 
 
USB Memory Interface  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)  
Hard Disk  
O
O
O
O
 
O
Network Interface 802.11b/g wireless LAN  
Network Interface Enthernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN  
Duplex (2-sided) printing  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FAX  
( : Included, O: Optional, Blank: Not Available)  
ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE  
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice  
users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
Document is synonymous with original.  
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
Following table offers the conventions of this guide:  
CONVENTION  
DESCRIPTION  
EXAMPLE  
Bold  
Note  
Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine.  
Start  
Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine  
function and feature.  
The date format may differ from  
country to country  
Caution  
Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical  
damage or malfunction.  
Do not touch the green underside of  
the toner cartridge.  
Footnote  
Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.  
a. pages per minute  
(See page 1 for more  
information)  
Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information. (See page 1 for more information)  
Features of your new laser product_3  
FINDING MORE INFORMATION  
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.  
Quick Install Guide  
Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.  
Online User’s Guide  
Printer Driver Help  
Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your  
machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.  
This user’s guide also contains a Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in  
various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.  
Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a  
printer driver help screen, click Help from the printer properties dialog box.  
Samsung website  
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,  
4_Features of your new laser product  
safety information  
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS  
What the icons and signs in this user’s guide mean:  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.  
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser MFP, follow these basic safety  
precautions:  
Do NOT attempt.  
Do NOT disassemble.  
Do NOT touch.  
Follow directions explicitly.  
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.  
Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.  
Call the service center for help.  
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others. Follow them explicitly. After reading this section, keep it in a safe  
place for future reference.  
1. Read and understand all instructions.  
2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.  
3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.  
4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the  
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.  
5. Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only  
a damp cloth for cleaning.  
6. Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.  
7. Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.  
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.  
9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.  
10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.  
11. Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points,  
creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.  
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is  
required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause  
electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.  
Safety information_5  
 
13. Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the  
following conditions:  
When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid has been spilled into the machine.  
If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.  
If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.  
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.  
14. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and  
may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.  
15. Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the  
AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.  
16. The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with  
a
110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWG or bigger.  
17. Use only No.26 AWG or larger telephone line cord.  
18. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
19. This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication  
configuration and etc)  
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge  
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and  
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to  
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.  
WARNING  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,  
can damage your eyes.  
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:  
6_Safety information  
OZONE SAFETY  
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is  
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.  
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.  
MERCURY SAFETY  
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws. (U.S.A only)  
POWER SAVER  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.  
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.  
RECYCLING  
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.  
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)  
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB  
cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or  
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to  
promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or  
their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should  
contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be  
mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.  
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems)  
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household  
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium  
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to  
human health or the environment.  
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through  
your local, free battery return system.  
Safety information_7  
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS  
FCC Information to the User  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These  
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to oper-  
ate the equipment.  
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing  
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la  
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.  
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15  
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be  
present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the  
presence of wireless devices.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system  
label.  
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the  
body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on.  
The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by  
the FCC.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must  
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use  
it. Contact manufacturer for service.  
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:  
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW/cm2 may be exceeded at  
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This  
device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.  
8_Safety information  
FAX BRANDING  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any  
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or  
on the first page of the transmission the following information:  
(1) the date and time of transmission  
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and  
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is  
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can  
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or  
require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given  
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service  
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of  
the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether  
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving  
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone  
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on  
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may  
cause harm to the telephone network.  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the  
user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone  
company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may  
temporarily cease service, providing that they:  
a) promptly notify the customer.  
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in  
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.  
You should also know that:  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and  
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with  
your machine.  
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power  
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the  
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency  
number.  
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
Safety information_9  
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)  
Important  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the  
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until  
you have another fuse cover.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have  
normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.  
Important warning:  
You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
Green and Yellow: Earth  
Blue: Neutral  
Brown: Live  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or  
green.  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)  
Approvals and Certifications  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/  
68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic  
compatibility.  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of  
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics  
Co., Ltd. representative.  
EC Certification  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched  
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and  
compatible PBXs of the European countries:  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional  
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the  
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.  
10_Safety information  
European Radio Approval Information  
(for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)  
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be  
present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are  
present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with  
Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.  
a
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the  
European Commission through the R&TTE directive.  
European States qualified under wireless approvals:  
EU  
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions),  
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland,  
Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K.  
EEA/EFTA countries  
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland  
European States with restrictions on use:  
EU  
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power  
such as wireless  
EEA/EFTA countries  
No limitations at this time.  
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS  
Wireless Guidance  
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be  
present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device.  
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The  
wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If  
the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices  
are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this  
time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety  
standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken  
to minimize human contact during normal operation.  
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body  
(this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are  
on and transmitting.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:  
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless  
devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices  
are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.  
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless  
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use  
of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices,  
ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.  
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling  
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of  
a wireless device in the destination country.  
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are  
in place and the system is fully assembled.  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use  
it. Contact manufacturer for service.  
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact  
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.  
Safety information_11  
OPENSSL LICENSE  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  
without  
5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.  
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written  
permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the  
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE  
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim  
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).  
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with  
Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply  
to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with  
this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric  
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be  
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in  
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes  
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library  
being used are not cryptographic related:-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an  
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,  
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,  
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply  
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]  
12_Safety information  
Safety information_13  
contents  
25  
14_Contents  
contents  
50  
Contents_15  
contents  
59  
62  
16_Contents  
contents  
70 To access SyncThru™ Web Service:  
File Policy  
Contents_17  
introduction  
These are the main components of your machine:  
This chapter includes:  
PRINTER OVERVIEW  
Front view  
Tray 1  
Scanner glass  
Scan unit  
9
20  
21  
Document input tray  
Document output tray  
10  
11  
a. CLX-6200FX has the ADF function, while CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX,  
and CLX-6240FX have the duplex ADF function. See page 49.  
Rear view  
1
2
USB port  
7
8
Power switch  
Document width guides  
USB memory port  
Paper level indicator  
Optional tray 2  
1
2
3
12  
13  
14  
DADFa  
Network port  
Power receptacle  
External device interface  
(EDI)b  
15-pin optional tray  
connection  
Control panel  
3
4
5
6
9
Multi-purpose tray paper  
width guides  
Output support  
4
15  
Telephone line socketa  
10 Control board cover  
11 Rear cover  
Front cover  
Toner cartridge  
Paper transfer belt  
Scanner lid  
5
6
7
8
16  
17  
18  
19  
Extension telephone socket  
(EXT)a  
Front cover handle  
Multi-purpose tray handle  
Multi-purpose tray  
Handle  
12 Cable organizer  
Scanner lock switch  
a.CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only.  
b.External device interface for Samsung and third party solutions. (CLX-  
6240FX only).  
Introduction_ 19  
         
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW  
CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only  
Selects the document type for the current copy  
Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
Original Type  
ID Copy  
17  
18  
Speed buttons  
Shift  
numbers and enter them with the touch of a few  
buttons.  
1
2
3
You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a  
driver’s license to a single side of paper. See  
Allows you to shift the speed buttons to access  
numbers 16 through 30.  
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers  
in memory or search for stored fax numbers or  
email addresses.  
Address Book  
Reduce/Enlarge Makes a copy smaller or larger than the original.  
19  
20  
Allows you to print documents on both sides of  
the paper.  
Duplex  
Adjusts the document resolution for the current  
fax job.  
Resolution  
4
5
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB  
In ready mode, redials the last number, or in Edit  
mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.  
Memory device when it is inserted into the USB  
Redial/Pause  
USB Print  
21  
memory port on the front of your machine. See  
Fax  
Activates Fax mode.  
Activates Copy mode.  
Activates Scan mode.  
6
7
8
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  
Number keypad  
22  
23  
characters. See page 30.  
Copy  
On Hook Dial  
Stop/Clear  
Engages the telephone line.  
Scan/Email  
Stops an operation at any time. In ready mode,  
clears/cancels the copy options, such as the  
darkness, the document type setting, the copy  
size, and the number of copies.  
Shows the current status and prompts during an  
operation.  
Display  
9
24  
The toner colors shown below the LCD display  
co-works with the display messages. See Status  
LED with the toner cartridge messages on page  
22.  
Toner colors  
10  
Color Start  
Black Start  
Starts a job in Color mode.  
25  
26  
Starts a job in Black and White mode.  
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
available menus.  
Menu (  
)
11  
12  
All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine  
depending on its options or models.  
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large  
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the  
surface, and do not allow children near it.  
Scroll through the options available in the  
selected menu, and increase or decrease values.  
Left/right arrow  
OK  
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
13  
14  
15  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
Shows the status of your machine. See page 22.  
Back (  
Status  
)
Adjusts the document brightness for the current  
Darkness  
16  
20 _Introduction  
       
CLX-6200ND only  
Stops an operation at any time. In ready mode,  
clears/cancels the copy options, such as the  
resolution, the document type setting, the copy  
size, and the number of copies.  
Copy  
Activates Copy mode.  
Activates Scan mode.  
1
2
Stop/Clear  
18  
Scan/Email  
Shows the current status and prompts during an  
operation.  
Display  
Color Start  
Black Start  
Starts a job in Color mode.  
3
4
19  
20  
Starts a job in Black and White mode.  
The toner colors shown below the LCD display  
co-works with the display messages. See  
Status LED with the toner cartridge messages  
Toner colors  
All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine  
depending on its options or models.  
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large  
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the  
surface, and do not allow children near it.  
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
available menus.  
Menu (  
)
5
6
Scroll through the options available in the  
selected menu, and increase or decrease  
values.  
Left/right arrow  
OK  
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
7
8
Back (  
Status  
)
Shows the status of your machine. See page  
9
Adjusts the document brightness for the current  
copy job. See page 39.  
Darkness  
10  
11  
Selects the document type for the current copy  
job. See page 39.  
Original Type  
ID Copy  
You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a  
driver’s license to a single side of paper. See  
12  
Reduce/Enlarge Makes a copy smaller or larger than the original.  
13  
14  
Allows you to print documents on both sides of  
Duplex  
the paper. See page 40.  
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB  
Memory device when it is inserted into the USB  
USB Print  
15  
memory port on the front of your machine. See  
Allows you to search for stored email  
Address Book  
16  
17  
addresses.  
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  
characters.  
Number keypad  
Introduction_ 21  
   
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED  
The color of the Status LED indicates the machine's current status.  
ACKNOWLEDGING THE STATUS OF THE  
TONER CARTRIDGE  
The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status LED and the LCD  
display. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the Status LED  
turns red and the display shows the message. However the arrow mark  
shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new  
cartridge.  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
Off  
The machine is powered off-line.  
The machine is in power save mode. When  
data is received, or any button is pressed, it  
switches to on-line automatically.  
Example:  
Green Blinking  
When the green LED slowly blinks, the  
machine is receiving data from the computer.  
When the green LED slowly rapidly, the  
machine is printing data.  
The above example shows the black cartridges status indicated by arrows.  
Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve it. See  
page 78 to browse the detailed information on error messages.  
On  
Blinking  
The machine is powered on and can be used.  
Red  
A minor error has occurred and the machine is  
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the  
display message, and solve the problem  
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.  
The estimated cartridge life of toner is close.  
Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You  
may temporarily increase the printing quality  
by redistributing the toner. (See  
"Redistributing toner" on page 66.)  
On  
A problem has occurred such as a paper jam,  
cover is open or no paper in the tray, so that  
the machine cannot continue the job. Check  
the message on the display, and refer to  
"Understanding display messages" on  
page 78 to solve the problem.  
A toner cartridge has almost reached its  
estimated cartridge life. It is recommended to  
replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing  
the toner cartridge" on page 67.)  
Always check the message on the display to solve the problem. The  
instruction in the Troubleshooting section will guide you to operate the  
for more information.  
22 _Introduction  
     
MENU OVERVIEW  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu ( ).  
Refer to the following diagram.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
.
Fax Feature  
Darkness  
Multi Send  
Delay Send  
Priority Send  
Forward  
Secure Receive  
Add Page  
Cancel Job  
Fax Setup  
Sending  
Redial Times  
Redial Term  
Prefix Dial  
ECM Mode  
Send Report  
Image TCR  
Dial Mode  
Fax Setup  
(Continued)  
Copy Feature  
Copy Setup  
Scan Size  
Change Default  
Copies  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Darkness  
Original Type  
Scan Feature  
Scan Feature  
(Continued)  
Stamp RCV Name Copy Collation  
USB Memory  
Scan Size  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
Scan Format  
E-mail  
FTP  
Scan Size  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
SMB  
Scan Size  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
RCV Start Code  
Auto Reduction  
Discard Size  
Junk Fax Setup  
DRPD Mode  
Duplex Print  
Change Default  
Resolution  
2-Up  
4-Up  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Book Copy.  
Margin Shift  
Edge Erase  
Gray Enhance  
Scan Size  
Receiving  
Receive Mode  
Ring to Answer  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
Darkness  
Auto Report  
Scan Setup  
System Setup  
System Setup  
(Continued)  
Network  
System Setup  
(Continued)  
Change Default  
USB Memory  
E-mail  
FTP  
SMB  
Machine Setup  
Machine ID  
Report  
All Report  
TCP/IP  
Ethernet Speed  
Wireless  
Clear Setting  
Network Info  
Clear Setting  
All Settings  
Fax Setup  
Machine Fax No.  
Date & Time  
Clock Mode  
Form Menu  
Select Form  
Language  
Default Mode  
Power Save  
Scan PWR Save  
Timeout  
Job Timeout  
Altitude Adj.  
Auto Continue  
Net Accounting  
Import Setting  
Export Setting  
Paper Setup  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Paper Source  
Sound/Volume  
Key Sound  
Configuration  
Supplies Info  
Address Book  
Send Report  
Sent Report  
Fax RCV Report  
Schedule Jobs  
JunkFax Report  
Network Info.  
NetScan Report  
User Auth List  
PCL Font List  
PS3 Font List  
Stored Job  
Copy Setup  
Scan Setup  
System Setup  
Network Setup  
Address Book  
Sent Report  
Fax RCV Report  
NetScan Report  
Job Manage  
Active Job  
Store Job  
File Policy  
ImageOverwrite  
Immediate  
Send Report  
Completed Job  
Net Auth Log  
Maintenance  
Supplies Life  
Color  
On Demand  
Serial Number  
Alarm Sound  
Speaker  
Ringer  
Introduction_ 23  
 
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE  
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES  
You must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CD  
after you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer. CD  
provides you with the following software.  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection  
Number of copies  
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following  
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer  
drivers:  
CD  
CONTENTS  
Printer  
software CD  
Windows  
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full  
advantage of your printer’s features.  
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)  
file: Use the PostScript driver to print  
documents with complex fonts and  
graphics in the PS language.  
Printer driver  
FEATURE  
Color mode  
WINDOWS  
LINUX  
MACINTOSH  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows  
Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers are  
available for scanning documents on  
your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to  
monitor the machine’s status and alerts  
you when an error occurs during printing.  
SmarThru Officea: This is the  
accompanying Windows-based software  
for your multifunctional machine.  
Direct Printing Utility: This program  
allows you to print PDF files directly.  
SetIP: Use this program to set your  
machine’s TCP/IP addresses.  
Machine quality option  
Poster printing  
X
Multiple pages per sheet  
(N-up)  
O (2, 4)  
O
Oa  
O
Fit to page printing  
Scale printing  
O
X
O
O
X
X
Different source for first  
page  
O
Watermark  
Overlay  
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
Linux  
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)  
file: Use this file to run your machine  
from a Linux computer and print  
documents.  
SANE: Use this driver to scan  
documents.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you  
to monitor the machine’s status and  
alerts you when an error occurs during  
printing.  
Duplex  
a.This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.  
PostScript driver  
FEATURE  
Color mode  
WINDOWS  
LINUX  
MACINTOSH  
Macintosh  
Printer driver: Use this driver to take  
full advantage of your printer’s  
features.  
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)  
file: Use this file to run your machine  
from a Macintosh computer and print  
documents.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is  
available for scanning documents on  
your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you  
to monitor the machine’s status and  
alerts you when an error occurs during  
printing.  
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Machine quality option  
Poster printing  
X
Multiple pages per sheet  
(N-up)  
O
O (2, 4)  
O
Oa  
O
Fit to page printing  
Scale printing  
O
X
O
X
X
X
Different source for first  
page  
O
a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image  
editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image  
editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, refer to  
the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.  
Watermark  
Overlay  
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
Duplex  
a.This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.  
24 _Introduction  
       
getting started  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.  
This chapter includes:  
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.  
3. Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.  
4. Install the toner cartridge.  
6. Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.  
7. Turn the machine on.  
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE  
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in  
the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and  
complete following steps.  
1. Select a stable location.  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow  
extra space to open covers and trays.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or  
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the  
edge of your desk or table.  
When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.  
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner,  
which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.  
PRINTING A DEMO PAGE  
Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly.  
To print a demo page:  
In ready mode, press and hold the OK button for about 2 seconds.  
SETTING UP THE NETWORK  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your  
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings through the  
machine's control panel.  
Supported operating environments  
The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
machine:  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Network interface  
Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX  
IEEE 802.11 b/g Wireless LAN  
(optional)  
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the  
altitude setting to optimize your printing. See "Altitude adjustment" on  
page 28 for more information.  
Network operating system  
Network protocols  
Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista  
Various Linux OS  
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5  
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline  
greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be  
affected.  
TCP/IP on Windows  
IPP  
SNMP  
DHCP  
BOOTP  
If you want to set up DHCP network protocol, go to http://  
Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating  
system and install the program. This program will allow you to set  
network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the  
installation window. This program does not support Linux.  
Getting started_ 25  
             
Starting the program  
1. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung  
Configuring network protocol via the machine  
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.  
Network Printer Utilities > SetIP.  
1. Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45  
Ethernet cable.  
2. Select the name of your printer and click  
.
2. Make sure you have turned on the machine.  
If you cannot find your printer name, click  
to refresh the list.  
3. Press Menu ( ) on the control panel, until you see Network on the  
bottom line of the display.  
3. Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,  
4. Press OK to access the menu.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until TCP/IP displays.  
6. Press OK.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until Static displays.  
8. Press OK.  
default gateway, and then click Apply.  
If you do not know the network card's MAC address, print the  
machine's network information report. (See "Printing reports" on  
4. Click OK to confirm the settings.  
5. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.  
9. Press the left/right arrow until IP Address displays.  
10. Press OK.  
Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the number keypad and press the  
left/right arrow to move between bytes.  
Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte.  
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following  
requirements:  
11. When you have finished, press OK.  
Repeat steps 9 and 10 to configure the other TCP/IP parameters:  
subnet mask and gateway address.  
Windows  
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.  
Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.  
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)  
OPERATING  
You can also set up the network settings through the network  
administration programs.  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
SYSTEM  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
CPU  
RAM  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer  
management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™  
Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of  
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and  
troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate  
internet access. Download this program from http://  
Pentium II 400 MHz  
(Pentium III 933 MHz) (128 MB)  
64 MB  
600 MB  
Pentium III 933 MHz  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
128 MB  
(256 MB)  
1.5 GB  
Windows Server Pentium III 933 MHz  
2003  
128 MB  
(512 MB)  
1.25 GB to  
2 GB  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
SyncThru™ Web Service: Web server embedded on your  
network print server, which allows you to:  
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to  
connect to various network environments.  
- Customize machine settings.  
Windows Vista  
Pentium IV 3 GHz  
512 MB  
(1024 MB)  
15 GB  
Windows Server Pentium IV 1 GHz  
2008 (Pentium IV 2 GHz)  
512 MB  
(2048 MB)  
10 GB  
SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and  
manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all  
Windows operating systems.  
Users who have an administrator right can install the software.  
Using the SetIP program  
Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine.  
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is  
the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.  
Especially, it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at  
the same time.  
Macintosh  
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)  
Installing the program  
1. Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver  
CD runs automatically, close the window.  
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD-  
ROM drive.)  
3. Double click Application > SetIP.  
4. Open the folder of the language you plan to use.  
5. Double click Setup.exe to install this program.  
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.  
OPERATING  
SYSTEM  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
CPU  
RAM  
Mac OS X  
10.3 ~ 10.4  
Intel Processor  
Power PC G4 /  
G5  
128 MB for a  
Power-PC based  
Mac (512 MB).  
512 MB for an  
Intel-based Mac  
(1 GB)  
1 GB  
Mac OS X 10.5  
Intel Processor 512 MB (1 GB)  
867 MHz or  
1 GB  
faster Power  
PC G4 /G5  
26 _Getting started  
             
4. Click Next.  
Linux  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Operating system RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32bit)  
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)  
Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64bit)  
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)  
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64bit)  
SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32bit)  
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64bit)  
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)  
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64bit)  
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)  
CPU  
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)  
512 MB (1024 MB)  
RAM  
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Free HDD space  
1 GB (2GB)  
5. Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.  
It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  
working with large scanned images.  
The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  
maximum.  
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE  
You have to install the machine software for printing. The software includes  
drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.  
The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as  
a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB  
cable, refer to Software section.  
The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating  
system. The procedure and popup window which appear during  
the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the  
printer feature, or the interface in use.  
6. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the printer  
you want to install from the list and then click Next.  
1. Connect the network cable to your machine.  
2. Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. (See  
"Setting up the network" on page 25.) All applications should be closed  
on your computer before beginning installation.  
3. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window  
appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type  
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive  
and click OK.  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.  
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run Setup.exe  
in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the User Account  
Control window.  
If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to refresh the  
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine to the network.  
To add the machine to the network, enter the port name and the IP  
address for the machine.  
To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer  
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer  
Getting started_ 27  
     
by clicking the Browse button.  
MACHINE'S BASIC SETTINGS  
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default  
settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.  
If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network  
administrator or print network information. (See "Printing  
7. After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a  
test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in  
order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the  
corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.  
Altitude adjustment  
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined  
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will  
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality  
of print.  
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the  
machine.  
1 Normal  
2 High 1  
3 High 2  
4 High 3  
If your machine does not work properly after the installation, try  
to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.  
0
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided  
During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer  
detects the location information for your operating system and  
sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a  
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to  
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to  
change the paper size after installation is complete.  
Printer Software CD.  
2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or  
Notification Area in Linux).  
You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X.  
3. Click Printer Setting.  
4. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select the appropriate value from  
the dropdown list, and then click Apply.  
If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru Web  
Service screen appears automatically. Click Machine Settings >  
Setup (or Machine Setup) > Altitude adj.. Select the appropriate  
altitude value, and then click Apply.  
Changing the display language  
To change the language that appears on the control panel, follow these  
steps:  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Language appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the language you want appears and press  
OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
28 _Getting started  
         
Setting the date and time  
The current date and time are shown on the display when your machine is  
on and ready to work. For the CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX, all  
of your faxes will have the date and time printed on them.  
Setting sounds  
You can control the following sounds:  
Key Sound: Turns the key sound on or off. With this option set to On, a  
tone sounds each time a key is pressed.  
Alarm Sound: Turns the alarm sound on or off. With this option set to  
On, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication  
ends.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
Speaker (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only): Turns on or  
off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker, such as a  
dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which means  
“Common,” the speaker is on until the remote machine answers.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Date & Time appears and press OK.  
4. Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.  
Month = 01 to 12  
Day = 01 to 31  
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial.  
Year = requires four digits  
Hour = 01 to 12 (12-hour mode)  
00 to 23 (24-hour mode)  
Ringer (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only): Adjusts the  
ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select Off, Low, Mid, and  
High.  
Minute = 00 to 59  
The date format may differ from country to country  
Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Sound/Volume appears and press  
You can also use the left/right arrow to move the cursor under the  
digit you want to correct and enter a new number.  
5. To select AM or PM for 12-hour format, press the *or # button or any  
number button.  
OK.  
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator, pressing the *or #  
button immediately moves the cursor to the indicator.  
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g. 01:00 PM as  
13:00). For details, see the next section.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the sound option you want appears  
and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status or volume for the  
sound you have selected appears and press OK.  
5. If necessary, repeat steps 3 through 5 to set other sounds.  
6. Press OK to save the time and date.  
When you enter a wrong number, Out of Range appears and the  
machine does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, simply  
reenter the correct number.  
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Speaker volume  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
1. Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the speaker.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until you hear the volume you want.  
3. Press Stop/Clear to save the change and return to ready mode.  
Changing the clock mode  
You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12-hour  
or 24-hour format.  
You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is  
connected.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Clock Mode appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the other mode and press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Entering characters using the number keypad  
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers.  
For example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your  
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or  
email addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.  
Entering alphanumeric characters  
1. When you are prompted to enter a letter, locate the button labeled  
with the character you want. Press the button until the correct letter  
appears on the display.  
Changing the default mode  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode. You can switch this default mode  
between Fax mode and Copy mode. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-  
6240FX only)  
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO.  
Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O,  
m, n, o and finally 6.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign, and etc.  
For details, see the below section.  
2. To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Default Mode appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the default mode you want appears and  
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the cursor by  
pressing the right left/right arrow button and then press the button  
labeled with the letter you want. The cursor will move to the right and  
the next letter will appear on the display.  
press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.  
3. When you have finished entering letters, press OK.  
Getting started_ 29  
                             
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
Keypad letters and numbers  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Scan PWR Save appears and press  
KEY  
1
ASSIGNED NUMBERS, LETTERS, OR CHARACTERS  
OK.  
1
Space  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  
press OK.  
2
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
C
F
I
a
d
g
j
b
e
h
c
f
2
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
3
3
Setting print job timeout  
4
i
4
You can set the amount of time a single print job is active before it must  
print.The machine handles incoming data as a single job if it comes in within  
the specified time. When an error occurs while processing data from the  
computer and the data flow stops, the machine waits the specified time and  
then cancels printing if data flow does not resume.  
5
L
k
l
5
6
M
P
T
O
m
n
o
6
r
7
R
V
Y
,
S
p
q
s
7
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Job Timeout appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  
8
t
u
v
/
8
9
W
X
Z
w
x
y
z
9
0
+
-
.
*
#
&
@
0
press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Correcting numbers or names  
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press the left  
left/right arrow button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the  
correct number or character.  
Auto continue  
This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not, in case the  
paper size you have set and the paper within the tray mismatches.  
Inserting a pause  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Auto Continue appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9, for  
example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases, you must  
insert a pause in the telephone number. You can insert a pause while  
you are setting up speed buttons or speed dial numbers.  
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place while  
entering the telephone number. A - appears on the display at the  
corresponding location.  
On: Automatically prints after set time passes, when the paper size  
mismatches the tray paper size.  
Off: Waits until you press Black Start or Color Start on the control  
panel, when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size.  
Using the save modes  
Power Save mode  
5. Press OK to save your selection.  
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power consumption  
when it is not in actual use. You can turn this mode on and select a  
length of time for which the machine waits after a job is printed before it  
switches to a reduced power state.  
Net accounting  
Net Accounting function limits the number of use for fax, printer, copy and  
scan. First, user need to install Net account Plug-in from SyncThru™ Web  
Admin Service. Create user account by entering user ID and Password in  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK.  
If you are not registered, request Administrator for a registration. (See page  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  
26)  
press OK.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Net Accounting appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press  
Scan Power Save mode  
Scan Power Save mode allows you to save power by turning off the  
scan lamp. The scan lamp under the scanner glass automatically turns  
off when it is not in actual use to reduce power consumption and extend  
the life of the lamp. The lamp automatically wakes up after some warm-  
up time when you start scanning.  
You can set the length of time for which the scan lamp waits after a scan  
job is completed before it switches to the power save mode.  
OK.  
Protect: Select the option for which you want to enable or disable  
Net Accounting.  
Chg.Password: The access password code can be changed.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
30 _Getting started  
               
Changing the font setting  
Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.  
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as  
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:  
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided  
software CD.  
2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or  
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status  
bar in Mac OS X.  
3. Click Printer Setting.  
4. Click Emulation.  
5. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting.  
6. Click Setting.  
7. Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list.  
8. Click Apply.  
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding  
languages.  
Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic  
Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)  
Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek  
Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,  
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic  
OCR : OCR-A, OCR-B  
Getting started_ 31  
   
loading originals and print media  
This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the  
LOADING ORIGINALS  
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
You can use the scanner glass or DADF (or ADF) to load an original for  
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.  
CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX has the DADF function  
which can let you scan on both sides of the original media at once.  
On the scanner glass  
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF (or ADF). If an original is  
detected in the DADF (or ADF), the machine gives it priority over the original  
on the scanner glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or  
gray-scaled images, use the scanner glass.  
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.  
3. Close the scanner lid.  
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality  
and toner consumption.  
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.  
Always keep it clean.  
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner  
lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.  
If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with  
the lid open.  
In the DADF (or ADF)  
Using the DADF (or ADF), you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (75 g/m2,  
20 lb bond) for one job.  
When you use the DADF (or ADF):  
In the ADF: Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x  
5.8 inches) or larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
In the DADF: Do not load paper smaller than 148 x 148 mm (5.8 x  
5.8 inches) or larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely  
dry before loading.  
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
32 _Loading originals and print media  
             
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having  
other unusual characteristics.  
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA  
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,  
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines  
for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines  
outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:  
1. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading originals.  
Poor print quality  
Increased paper jams  
Premature wear on the machine.  
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are  
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
2. Load the original face up into the DADF (or ADF). Make sure that the  
bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the  
document input tray.  
The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are  
described later in this section.  
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for  
your project.  
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how  
crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and  
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of  
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,  
or other variables over which Samsung has no control.  
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it  
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.  
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause  
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by  
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.  
3. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.  
Dust on the DADF (or ADF) glass may cause black lines on the  
printout. Always keep it clean.  
Loading originals and print media_ 33  
 
Specifications on print media  
WEIGHTA  
CAPACITYB  
TYPE  
Plain paper  
SIZE  
DIMENSIONS  
Letter  
Legal  
US Folio  
A4  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)  
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)  
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb  
bond) for the tray  
250 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) paper for the  
tray  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb  
bond) for the multi-purpose  
tray  
100 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) in the multi-  
purpose tray  
500 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) paper for  
optional tray  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Executive  
A5  
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb  
bond) for the tray  
150 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) paper for the  
tray  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb  
bond) for the multi-purpose  
tray  
Statement  
A6  
100 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) in the multi-  
purpose tray  
75 to 105 g/m2 (20 to 28 lb  
bond)  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) in the multi-purpose  
tray  
Envelope  
Envelope Monarch  
Envelope 6 3/4  
Envelope No. 10  
Envelope No. 9  
Envelope DL  
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)  
92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.5 inches)  
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)  
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Envelope C5  
Envelope C6  
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb  
bond)  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) paper for the multi-  
purpose tray  
Labels  
Letter, Legal, US  
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO  
B5, Executive, A5,  
Statement  
90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb  
bond)  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) paper for the multi-  
purpose tray  
Card stock  
Letter, Legal, US  
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO  
B5, Executive, A5,  
Statement  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to43 lb bond)  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.  
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
34 _Loading originals and print media  
   
Media sizes supported in each mode  
MEDIA TYPE  
GUIDELINES  
MODE  
Copy mode  
SIZE  
SOURCE  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with  
more than one flap that folds over to seal must use  
adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s  
specification to view the fusing temperature, see  
page 100. The extra flaps and strips might cause  
wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage  
the fuser.  
For the best print quality, position margins no closer  
than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.  
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s  
seams meet.  
Letter, A4, Legal,  
Oficio, US Folio,  
Executive, JIS B5, A5,  
A6  
Print mode  
All sizes supported by  
the machine  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
Fax modea  
Letter, A4, Legal  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels  
designed for use in laser machines.  
- When selecting labels, consider the following  
factors:  
Duplex printingb  
Letter, A4, Legal, US  
Folio, Oficio  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be  
stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.  
Check your machine’s specification to view the  
fusing temperature, see page 99.  
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed  
backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets  
that have spaces between the labels, causing  
serious jams.  
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no  
more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.  
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles,  
bubbles, or other indications of separation.  
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive  
material between labels. Exposed areas can cause  
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause  
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause  
damage to machine components.  
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine  
more than once. The adhesive backing is designed  
for only a single pass through the machine.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the  
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise  
damaged.  
a.CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only  
b.75 to 105 g/m2 (20~28 lb bond) only  
Guidelines for special print media  
MEDIA TYPE  
Envelopes  
GUIDELINES  
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the  
quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,  
consider the following factors:  
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should  
not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may occur.  
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should  
lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not  
contain air.  
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,  
nicked, or otherwise damaged.  
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are  
compatible with the heat and pressure of the  
machine during operation.  
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and  
well creased folds.  
Do not use stamped envelopes.  
Card stock or  
custom-sized  
materials  
Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm wide or  
356 mm long.  
In the software application, set margins at least  
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.  
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows,  
coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic  
materials.  
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope  
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.  
Preprinted  
paper  
Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink  
that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous  
emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s  
specification to view the fusing temperature, see  
page 99.  
Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should  
not adversely affect printer rollers.  
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a  
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during  
storage.  
Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms  
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is  
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off  
preprinted paper, reducing print quality.  
1 Acceptable  
2 Unacceptable  
Loading originals and print media_ 35  
   
5. Place the tray into the machine.  
6. Set the paper size from your computer.  
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE  
PAPER TRAY  
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper  
jams.  
1 Tray extend lever  
2 Paper length guide  
3 Paper width guide  
1. Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset to  
LOADING PAPER  
Letter or A4 size depending on the country.  
Loading paper in the tray 1 or optional tray  
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.  
The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) plain  
paper.  
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to  
load an additional 500 sheets of paper. (See "" on page 91.)  
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,  
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s  
warranty or service agreements.  
1. To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the  
side you want to print facing up.  
2. After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width guide  
as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the  
side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the  
paper; the guide may bend the paper.  
When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the  
tray.  
3. Press and hold the green lever on the back of the tray, when you are  
1 Full  
holding the lever, extend the tray to the corresponding position.  
2 Empty  
2. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See  
Software section for PC-printing.  
If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a  
time in the multi-purpose tray.  
You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be  
facing down with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience  
problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print  
quality is not guaranteed.  
4. Load the paper into the tray.  
36 _Loading originals and print media  
             
3. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to  
the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be bent,  
which will result in a paper jam or skew.  
Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray  
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,  
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page  
printing on letterhead or colored paper.  
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray  
Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in  
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print  
media.  
Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into  
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.  
Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and  
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading  
them into the multi-purpose tray.  
1. Hold the handle of multi-purpose tray and pull it down to open.  
Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following  
loading guidelines:  
Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the  
top left side.  
Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine  
first.  
Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the  
machine.  
Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the  
machine first.  
Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with  
an uncurled edge toward the machine.  
4. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-purpose  
tray. See Software section for PC-printing.  
2. Load the paper.  
The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on  
the control panel.  
5. After printing, close the multi-purpose tray.  
If you want to load the used paper, place the paper with the  
printed side facing down.  
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack  
to separate the pages before loading.  
Loading originals and print media_ 37  
     
ADJUSTING THE OUTPUT SUPPORT  
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE  
The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help  
the printed pages to align. For the output support to correctly align the  
pages, you need to pull it out appropriately depending on the paper size.  
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and  
type using the control panel buttons. These settings will apply to Copy and  
Fax modes. For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in  
the application program you use on your PC.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Paper Size appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper size you are using appears and  
press OK.  
6. Press Back (  
) to return to the upper level.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until the paper type you are using appears and  
1 Output support  
2 Extension  
press OK.  
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
If the output support is incorrectly adjusted, printed pages may be  
mis-aligned or fall.  
If you continuously print many pages, the surface of the output tray  
may become hot. Be careful not to touch the surface, and  
especially keep out of children’s reach.  
If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper, select  
Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties. See Software  
section.  
For Letter-sized paper  
Pull out the output support to the location indicated LTR as shown, and  
unfold the extension.  
For A4- or Legal-sized paper  
Pull out the output support to the location indicated A4, LGL as shown, and  
unfold the extension.  
38 _Loading originals and print media  
           
copying  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.  
This chapter includes:  
Darkness  
SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY  
If you have an original containing faint markings and dark images, you can  
adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.  
After loading the print media for copy output, you must select the paper tray  
you will use for copy jobs.  
To adjust the darkness of copies, press Darkness. Each time you press the  
button, the following modes are available:  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
Lightest: Works well with darker print.  
Light: Works well with dark print.  
Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals.  
Dark: Works well with light print.  
Darkest: Works well with lighter print or faint pencil markings.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Copy Tray appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  
press OK.  
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Original Type  
The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the  
document type for the current copy job.  
COPYING  
To select the document type, press Original Type. Each time you press the  
button, the following modes are available:  
1. Press Copy.  
Ready to Copy appears on the top line of the display.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines.  
4. If you want to customize the copy settings including copy size, darkness,  
and original type, by using the control panel buttons. See page 39.  
If necessary, you can use special copy features, such as poster copying,  
2- or 4-up copying. See page 40.  
Reduced or enlarged copy  
By using the Reduce/Enlarge button, you can reduce or enlarge the size of  
a copied image from 25% to 400% when you copy original documents from  
the scanner glass, or from 25% to 100% from the DADF (or ADF).  
5. Press Color Start to begin color copying.  
Or, press Black Start to begin black and white copying.  
To select from the predefined copy sizes:  
1. Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
2. Press Reduce/Enlarge or the left/right arrow until the size setting  
You can cancel the copy job during an operation. Press Stop/Clear,  
and the copying will stop.  
you want appears and press OK.  
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY  
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate:  
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly  
and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for  
each copy, use the copy function buttons on the control panel.  
1. Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
2. Press Reduce/Enlarge or the left/right arrow until Custom appears  
and press OK.  
If you press Stop/Clear while setting the copy options, all of the  
options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and  
returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to  
their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress.  
3. Enter the scale rate and press OK to save the selection.  
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the  
bottom of your copy.  
Copying_ 39  
                   
5. Open the scanner lid and turn the original over.  
CHANGING THE SCAN SIZE SETTINGS  
If you press Stop/Clear or if no buttons are pressed for  
approximately 30 seconds, the machine cancels the copy job and  
returns to ready mode.  
You can adjust the scan size for the original paper. For example, if you scan  
a A4-sized original and set the scan size to A5, the machine scans only the  
area of A5 (148 x 210 mm). We recommend you to change the right scan  
size for the original paper. This function is only available in CLX-6200ND,  
CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX. After loading the print media for copy output,  
you need to set the scan size using the control panel buttons.  
6. Press Color Start to begin color copying.  
Or, press Black Start to begin black and white copying  
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not  
1. Press Copy.  
be printed.  
If you press Stop/Clear or if no buttons are pressed for approximately  
30 seconds, the machine cancels the copy job and returns to ready  
mode.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Scan Size appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press  
OK.  
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES  
You can use the following copy features:  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
After using this option, the machine automatically resumes to the  
default setting.  
Collation  
You can set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2  
copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print  
followed by a second complete document.  
CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTINGS  
The copy options, including darkness, original type, copy size, and number  
of copies, can be set to those most frequently used. When you copy a  
document, the default settings are used unless they have been changed by  
using the corresponding buttons on the control panel.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or  
place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
1. Press Copy.  
3. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Change Default appears.  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
5. Press OK when Copy Collation appears.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you  
want.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setup option you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press  
There are two types of mode as following:  
OK.  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5, as needed.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
7. Press OK to begin copying.  
While you are setting copy options, pressing Stop/Clear cancels the  
changed settings and restores the defaults.  
One complete document will print followed by the second complete  
document.  
2-up or 4-up copying  
Your machine can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet  
of paper.  
ID CARD COPYING  
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet of A4-, Letter-, Legal-  
, Folio-, Oficio-, Executive-, B5-, A5-, or A6-sized paper.  
1. Press Copy.  
When you copy using this feature, the machine prints one side of the  
original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half  
without reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a  
small-sized item, such as a name card.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or  
place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until 2-Up or 4-Up appears  
and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you  
want.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
1
3
2
4
1. Press ID Copy.  
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Place Front Side and Press[Start] appears on the  
There are two types of mode as following:  
display.  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
4. Press Color Start or Black Start  
.
Your machine begins scanning the front side and  
shows Place Back Side and Press[Start]  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge button for  
making a 2- or 4-up copy.  
40 _Copying  
                     
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Adjust Bkgd. appears and press OK.  
Poster copying  
Your machine can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3x3). You can  
paste the printed pages together to make one poster-sized document.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance Lev. 1~2: The higher the number is, the more vivid the  
background is.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
Erase Lev. 1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter the  
background is.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Poster Copy appears  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you  
want.  
Book copying  
There are two types of mode as following:  
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book. If the book is too  
thick, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close  
the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with  
the cover open.  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is  
scanned and printed one by one in the following order:  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Book Copy appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you  
Clone copying  
Your machine can print multiple image copies from the original document on  
a single page. The number of images is automatically determined by the  
original image and paper size.  
want appears.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the book.  
Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the book.  
Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of the book.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you want.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Clone Copy appears  
7. Press OK to begin copying.  
and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you  
want.  
Margin shift  
The Margin Shift feature allows you to create a binding edge for the  
document. The image can be adjusted up or down on the page and/or  
shifted to the right or left.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
The Margin Shift feature can either be used for Scan glass or DADF  
(or ADF) depending on the set up.  
-Auto Center: Scanner glass  
-Custom Margin: Scanner glass, DADF (or ADF)  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge button  
while making a clone copy.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place  
a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
Adjusting background images  
You can set the machine to print an image without its background. This  
copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when  
copying an original containing color in the background, such as a  
newspaper or a catalog.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Margin Shift appears.  
1. Press Copy.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
want appears.  
Off: This feature is disabled.  
Auto Center: Automatically copy in the center of the paper.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
Copying_ 41  
                 
Custom Margin: Enter the left, right, top, bottom margin using  
Number keypad.  
1->2Side Short: Copys pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.  
When Original Type is set in Photo, CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX,  
CLX-6210FX can use this function in DADF(or ADF) but CLX-  
6240FX can use this function in both DADF(or ADF) and in  
Scanner glass.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select Yes.  
7. Press OK to begin copying.  
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Edge erase  
Edge erase allows you to erase sports, drill holes, fold creases and staple  
marks along any of the four edges of a document.  
The Edge Erase feature can either be used for scan glass or DADF (or  
ADF) depending on the set up  
.
1->2Side Long: Copys pages to be read like a book.  
-
-
-
-
Small Original  
Hole Punch Scanner glass  
Book Center Scanner glass  
Border Erase Scanner glass DADF (or ADF)  
:
Scanner glass  
:
,
DADF (or ADF)  
:
:
,
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place  
a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
When Original Type is set in Photo, CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX,  
CLX-6210FX can use this function in DADF(or ADF) but CLX-  
6240FX can use this function in both DADF(or ADF) and in  
Scanner glass.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Edge Erase appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you  
2 ->1Side: Copys both sides of the originals and prints each of one on  
a separate sheet. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
want appears.  
Off: Does not set the binding option.  
Small Original. Erases the edge of the original if it is small.  
Hole Punch. Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.  
Book Center. Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and  
horizontal, when you copy a book.  
2 ->2Side: Copys both sides of the original and prints on both sides  
of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from  
the originals. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
Border Erase. Erases the certain amount of the edge of the printout.  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Gray enhance copying  
When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better  
quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.  
1. Press Copy.  
2 ->1Side ROT2: Copys both sides of the original and prints each one  
on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
is rotated 180°. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Gray Enhance appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select On.  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
4. Press OK to save your selection.  
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex button is backlit.  
PRINTING ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER  
By using the Duplex button on your machine, you can set the machine to  
SETTING COPY TIMEOUT  
You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default copy  
settings, if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel.  
print documents on both sides of paper.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Press Duplex.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
Off: Copys in Normal mode.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK.  
42 _Copying  
           
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears.  
Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default  
settings until you press Black Start or Color Start to begin copying, or  
Stop/Clear to cancel.  
5. Press OK to save your selection.  
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Copying_ 43  
scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.  
This chapter includes:  
SCANNING FROM THE CONTROL PANEL  
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the  
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not  
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced  
resolution.  
Your machine offers you to scan from the control panel and easily send the  
scanned document to connected computer's My Documents folder. In  
order to use this function, your machine and computer must be connect by  
USB cable or by network.  
Also, with the offered Samsung Scan Manager program, scanned  
documents can be opened with the program you have setup previously.  
Such as Microsoft Paint, Email, SmarThru Office, OCR can be added to  
SCANNING BASICS  
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the  
network.  
Scanned images can be saved as BMP, JEPG, TIFF, PDF files.  
Samsung Scan Manager: You just walk to the machine with the  
originals and scan them from the control panel then, the scanned data  
will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When  
the setup installation is completed, then you have installed the  
Samsung Scan Manager on your computer already. This feature can  
be used via the local connection or the network connection. See next  
section.  
Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager.  
You can find out about Samsung Scan Manager program information and  
installed scan driver's condition. Also, you can change scan settings and  
add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are save in  
Samsung Scan Manager program.  
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an  
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process. See the Software section. This feature can be used  
via the local connection or the network connection. See Software  
section.  
Samsung SmarThru Office : This feature is the accompanying  
software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or  
documents, and this feature can be used via the local connection or the  
network connection. See Software section.  
Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window  
and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, See Software  
section.  
1. Press Start>Control Panel> Samsung Scan Manager.  
Samsung Scan Manager Administration appears.  
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by pressing the Smart  
Panel icon's right in the window task bar.  
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager.  
3. Press Scan Property.  
4. Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving destination and scan  
settings, add or delete application program and format files.  
You can change the scanning machine by using Change Port. (Local or  
Network)  
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature  
your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB  
cable. See Software section.  
Email: You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.  
See page 46.  
FTP: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. See page 47.  
SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB  
5. Press OK after setting is done.  
server. See page 47.  
Scanning to application programs  
1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly  
connected to each other.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
Ready to Scan appears on the top line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to PC appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press  
OK.  
44 _Scanning  
         
6. Depending on the port connection, different massages appear. Check  
Registering local authorized users  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings.  
the following messages and move on to the next step.  
Scan Destination: Connected by USB. Move to step 7.  
ID: Connected by Network and user is registered. Move to step 6.  
WLocal PC X: Choosing USB or Network to scan. If connected by  
USB, move to step 5. If connected by Network, move to step 6.  
3. Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User  
Authentication web page.  
Not Available: Neither connected by USB nor Network. Check the  
port connection.  
4. Click Add.  
5. Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the port you want appears on the display.  
entry, from 1 to 50.  
8. Enter the registered user ID and PIN and click OK.  
6. Enter your name, auth ID, password, e-mail address and phone  
number.  
You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the  
machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel.  
7. Click Apply.  
ID is the same ID as the registered ID for Samsung Scan  
Manager.  
PIN is the 4 digit number registered for Samsung Scan  
Manager.  
Register authorized network users  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
9. From Scan Destination, press the left/right arrow until the application  
program you want appears, then press OK.  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
Default setting is My Documents.  
2. Click Machine Settings.  
3. Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User  
To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or  
delete the application program in Samsung Scan Manager>Set  
Scan Button.  
Authentication web page.  
4. Click Apply and OK.  
10. To scan from the default setting, press Color Start or Black Start. Press  
5. Select the Authentication Type that you prefer.  
6. Configure the values for each feature, as follows.  
7. Click Apply.  
the left/right button until the setting you want appears then press OK.  
11. Scanning begins.  
Scanned image is saved in computer's My Documents> My  
Pictures>Samsung folder.  
You can use Tawin driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan  
Manager program.  
You can also scan by pressing Window's Start>Control  
Panel> Samsung Scan Manager>Quick Scan.  
Network user authenticated by Kerberos  
1. Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.  
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 88.  
SCANNING BY A NETWORK CONNECTION  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network  
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.  
5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.  
6. Click Apply.  
Network user authorized by SMB  
1. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.  
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
Preparing for network scanning  
Before using your machine’s network scanning features, you need to  
configure the following settings, depending on your scan destination:  
Register as an authorized user for scanning to email, FTP, or SMB  
Set up the SMTP server for scanning to email  
Set up the FTP servers for scanning to FTP  
5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.  
6. Click Apply.  
Set up the SMB servers for scanning to SMB  
User can add up to 6 alternate domains.  
User authentication for network scanning  
To send an email, FTP, SMB or Network, you must register authorized  
local or network users using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Network authorized user by LDAP  
If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users  
or on the DB server (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos) can send scanned data  
to the network (email, FTP, SMB, Network).  
For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must  
register the network or local authentication configuration using the  
SyncThru™ Web Service.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 389.  
User authentication has 3 options: none (Default), network  
authentication, and local authentication.  
6. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP  
directory tree.  
7. Select Authentication method. Two options for LDAP server login.  
Anonymous:This is used to bind with null password and login ID  
Scanning_ 45  
   
(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).  
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.  
10. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to  
permit access to unauthorized persons. It is unchecked by default.  
8. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.  
11. Enter the login name and password.  
9. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute  
12. Enter the Scan File Folder under FTP directory for saving the  
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).  
scanned image.  
10. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search  
13. Click Apply.  
results and search timeout.  
Setting up an SMB server  
To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to  
SMB servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and SMB Setup.  
3. Click Server List.  
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server if the  
LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server  
has a referral server.  
11. Select Serach Name Order that you desire.  
12. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.  
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network  
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may  
check this option if you want to search for information in a default  
email address group.  
4. Click Add.  
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.  
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  
List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.  
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
13. Click Apply.  
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
Setting up an e-mail account  
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up  
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
10. Enter the Share name of the server.  
11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit  
unauthorized persons to access the SMB server. This box is  
unchecked by default.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 25.  
12. Enter the login name and password.  
13. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.  
14. Enter the Scan File Folder under shared folder for storing the  
scanned image.  
6. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require  
15. Click Apply.  
authentication.  
7. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
8. Click Apply.  
Scanning to Email  
You can scan and send an image as an email attachment. You first need to  
set up your email account in SyncThru™ Web Service. See page 46.  
If the authentication method of SMTP server is  
POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3  
Before SMTP Authentication.  
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See page  
47.  
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host  
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
name.  
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default  
port number is 25.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to Email appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
5. Enter the recipient’s email address and press OK.  
If you have set up Address Book, you can use a speed button or a speed email  
or group email number to retrieve an address from memory. See page 48.  
6. To enter additional addresses, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
Setting up an FTP server  
To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP  
servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and FTP Setup.  
3. Click Server List.  
step 5.  
4. Click Add.  
To continue to the next step, press the left/right arrow to select No and  
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.  
press OK.  
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  
7. If the display asks if you want to send the email to your account, press  
List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.  
the left/right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.  
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Send To  
Self option in the email account setup.  
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 21.  
8. Enter an email subject and press OK.  
46 _Scanning  
         
9. Press the left/right arrow until the file format you want appears and press  
OK or Start.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.  
10. If the machine asks if you want to log off your account, press the left/  
right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.  
11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH SCAN JOB  
Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to  
customize your scan jobs.  
Scan Size: Sets the image size.  
Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.  
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.  
Scan Color: Sets the color mode.  
Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If  
you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.  
Depending on the selected scan type, this option may not appear.  
Scanning to an FTP server  
You can scan an image and then upload it to an FTP server. You need to  
set up parameters for access to FTP servers from SyncThru™ Web  
Service. See page 46.  
To customize the settings before starting a scan job:  
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See page 47.  
1. Press Scan/Email.  
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF) or place a single original  
on the scanner glass.  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to FTP appears on the bottom line  
OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  
and press OK.  
of the display and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.  
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options.  
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
5. Enter the user ID and press OK.  
6. Enter the password and press OK.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the FTP server you want appears and  
press OK or Start.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until the file type you want appears and press  
CHANGING THE DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS  
OK or Start.  
To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job, you can set up  
default scan settings for each scan type.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified  
server.  
1. Press Scan/Email.  
Scanning to an SMB server  
You can scan an image and then send it to an SMB server. You need to set  
up parameters for access to SMB servers from SyncThru™ Web Service.  
See page 46.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Change Default appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK  
.
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See page  
47.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  
and press OK.  
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF) or place a single original  
on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other settings.  
8. To change the default settings for other scan types, press Back (  
and repeat from step 4.  
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
)
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to SMB appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
5. Enter the user ID and press OK.  
6. Enter the password and press OK.  
PRINTING SCAN CONFIRMATION REPORT  
AUTOMATICALLY  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the SMB server you want appears and  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report showing whether a  
transmission was successful, how many pages were sent, and more. The  
report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP.  
press OK or Start.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until the file format you want appears and press  
OK or Start.  
1. Press Scan/Email.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified  
server.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Send Report appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  
and press OK.  
On-Error: Only in case of error occurrence, the machine prints the report.  
On: The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or  
failed.  
Off: No report is printed after completing a job.  
Scanning_ 47  
               
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
12. Click Add.  
Using Address Book entries  
To retrieve an email address, use the following ways:  
SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK  
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently  
via SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email  
addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address  
Book.  
Speed email numbers  
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  
email, enter the speed email number at which you stored the address  
you want.  
For a one-digit speed email location, press and hold the  
corresponding digit button from the number keypad.  
For a two- or three-digit speed email location, press the first digit  
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.  
Registering speed email numbers  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
3. Click Individual Address Book and Add.  
4. Select a location number and enter the user name and e-mail address  
If you are an CLX-6200FX user, you can also press the speed buttons at  
which you stored the address you want.  
You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address  
Book. See page 48.  
you want.  
5. Click Apply.  
Group email numbers  
To use a group email entry, you need to search for and select it from  
memory.  
You can also click Import and obtain your address book from your  
computer.  
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  
email, press Address Book. See page 48  
Configuring group email numbers  
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to  
access the web site of your machine.  
Global email addresses  
To use a global email addresses in the LDAP server, you need to search  
for and select it from memory.  
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  
email, press Address Book. See page 48.  
1. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
2. Click Group Address Book and Add.  
3. Select a group number and enter the group name you want.  
4. Select speed email numbers that will be included in the group.  
5. Click Apply.  
Searching Address Book for an entry  
There are two ways to search for an address in memory. You can either  
scan from A to Z sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the  
name associated with the address.  
Retrieving global email addresses from the LDAP  
server  
You can use not only local addresses stored in your machine's memory but  
also ones in the LDAP server. To use the global addresses, configure the  
LDAP server first via SyncThru™ Web Service as following:  
Searching sequentially through memory  
1. If necessary, press Scan/Email.  
2. Press Address Book until Search & Send appears on the bottom  
line of the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when All appears.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings, LDAP Server Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 389.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the name and address you want  
appears. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire  
memory in alphabetical order.  
6. Enter Search Root Directory. The top search level of the LDAP  
Searching with a particular first letter  
1. If necessary, press Scan/Email.  
2. Press Address Book until Search & Send appears on the bottom  
line of the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.  
directory tree  
7. Select Authentication method. Method of LDAP server login.  
Anonymous: This is used to bind with NULL password and login ID  
(Password and login ID are grayed in SWS).  
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.  
8. Put a check mark of Append Root to Base DN for adding Base DN to  
login name.  
5. Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press  
9. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search results  
and search timeout.  
OK.  
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server in case  
LDAP server has no data to reply of query and LDAP server has  
any referral server.  
10. Select Serach Name Order that you want.  
11. Put a check mark of "From:" Field Security Options.  
48 _Scanning  
             
Printing Address Book  
You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.  
1. Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
2. Press OK.  
A list showing your speed button settings, and the speed/group email  
entries print out.  
SCAN ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER  
By using the Duplex button on your machine, you can set the machine to  
scan on both sides of paper. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
1. Press Duplex.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
Off: Scans in Normal mode.  
2 Side: Scans both sides of the original.  
2 ->1Side ROT2: Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on  
a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is  
rotated 180°.  
3. Press OK to save your selection.  
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex button is backlit.  
Scanning_ 49  
     
basic printing  
This chapter explains common printing tasks.  
This chapter includes:  
PRINTING A DOCUMENT  
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or  
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary  
depending on the application you use.  
For details about printing, see the Software section.  
CANCELING A PRINT JOB  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer  
group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
3. Double-click the Samsung CLX-6200 Series or CLX-6240 Series icon.  
(Or Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240 Series PS)  
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.  
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer  
icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop/Clear on the control  
panel.  
50 _Basic printing  
     
faxing  
The fax feature is available only on the CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX. This chapter gives you information about using  
your machine as a fax machine.  
This chapter includes:  
quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce  
a higher quality Fax.  
1. Press Resolution.  
You cannot use this machine as a fax machine via the internet  
phone.  
2. Press Resolution or the left/right arrow until the option you want  
We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services (PSTN:  
public switched telephone network) when connecting telephone lines  
to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you  
can improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The  
Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves  
connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not  
provided with the machine, contact your Internet Service provider for  
use on DSL Micro-filter.  
appears.  
3. Press OK to save your selection.  
Recommended resolution settings for different original document types  
are described in the table below:  
MODE  
Standard  
RECOMMENDED FOR:  
Originals with normal sized characters.  
Fine  
Originals containing small characters or thin  
lines or originals printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Super Fine  
Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super  
Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with  
which you are communicating also supports the  
Super Fine resolution.  
1 Line port  
2 Micro filter  
For memory transmission, Super Fine  
mode is not available. The resolution  
setting is automatically changed to  
Fine.  
3 DSL modem / Telephone line  
SENDING A FAX  
When your machine is set to Super  
Fine resolution and the fax machine  
with which you are communicating does  
not support Super Fine resolution, the  
machine transmits using the highest  
resolution mode supported by the other  
fax machine.  
Setting the fax header  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on  
any fax you send. The Machine ID, containing your telephone number and  
name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from  
your machine.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
Photo Fax  
Originals containing shades of gray or  
photographs.  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press OK when Machine ID appears.  
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the  
default setting, see page 57.  
4. Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad. You  
can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad, and  
include special symbols by pressing the 0 button. For details on how to  
enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.  
Darkness  
You can select the default contrast mode to fax your originals lighter or  
darker.  
5. Press OK to save the ID.  
1. Press Fax.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Fax No. appears and press OK.  
7. Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK.  
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
2. Press Menu ( ) , and then OK when Fax Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display.  
3. Press OK when Darkness appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press  
OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change  
the default setting, see page 57.  
Adjusting the document settings  
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your  
original’s status to get the best quality.  
Resolution  
The default document settings produce good results when using typical  
text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor  
Faxing_ 51  
             
Sending a fax automatically  
Redialing the last number  
To redial the number you called last:  
1. Press Redial/Pause.  
2. When an original is loaded in the DADF (or ADF), the machine  
automatically begins to send.  
1. Press Fax  
.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
Ready to Fax appears on the top line of the display.  
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.  
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,  
select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
4. Enter the receiving fax machine’s number.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.  
For details about storing and searching for a number, see page 57.  
5. Press Color Start or Black Start.  
Sending faxes on both sides of paper  
You can set the machine to send faxes on both sides of paper. (CLX-  
6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
6. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK.  
1. Press Fax  
.
7. When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
After the number is dialed, the machine begins sending the fax when the  
receiving fax machine answers.  
2. Press Duplex.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
Off: Send faxes in Normal mode.  
2 Side: Send faxes on both sides of the original.  
2 ->1Side ROT2: Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints  
each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side  
of the printout is rotated 180°.  
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at any time while  
sending.  
Sending a fax manually  
1. Press Fax  
.
4. Press OK to save your selection.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex button is backlit.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. See page  
RECEIVING A FAX  
Selecting the paper tray  
4. Press On Hook Dial. You hear a dial tone.  
5. Enter the receiving fax machine’s number.  
After loading the print media for fax output, you have to select the paper tray  
you will use for the fax reception.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.  
For details about storing and searching for a number, see page 57.  
6. Press Color Start or Black Start when you hear a high-pitched fax  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Fax Tray appears and press OK  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  
press OK  
.
signal from the remote fax machine.  
.
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at any time while  
sending.  
.
.
Confirming a transmission  
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine  
beeps and returns to ready mode.  
.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message  
appears on the display. For a list of error messages and their meanings, see  
page 78. If you receive an error message, press Stop/Clear to clear the  
message and try to send the fax again.  
Changing receiving modes  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK  
.
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each  
time sending a fax is completed. For further details, see page 56.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK  
.
4. Press OK when Receive Mode appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the fax reception mode you want appears.  
Automatic redialing  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you  
send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number every three  
minutes, up to seven times according to the factory default settings.  
In Fax mode, the machine answers an incoming fax call and  
immediately goes into the fax reception mode.  
In Tel mode, you can receive a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and  
then Color Start or Black Start. You can also pick up the handset of  
the extension phone and then press the remote receive code. See  
page 53.  
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press OK to redial the number  
without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Stop/Clear.  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial  
attempts. See page 56.  
In Ans/Fax mode, an answering machine attached to your machine  
answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the  
answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line,  
the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.  
See page 53.  
In DRPD mode, you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring  
52 _Faxing  
                             
Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables an user to use a single telephone  
line to answer several different telephone numbers. For further  
details, see page 53.  
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode  
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to  
use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.  
The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different  
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short  
ringing sounds. This feature is often used by answering services who  
answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which  
number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.  
6. Press OK to save your selection.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
When the memory is full, the printer can no longer receive any  
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data  
stored in the memory.  
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the  
EXT socket on the back of your machine.  
If you do not want other people to view your received documents,  
you can use secure receiving mode. In this mode, all of the  
received faxes are stored in memory. For further details, see page  
53.  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature, your fax  
machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered by the fax  
machine. Unless you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be  
recognized and answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be  
forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into  
the EXT socket. You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time.  
Before using the DRPD option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on  
your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up DRPD, you will  
need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial  
your fax number from outside.  
Receiving automatically in Fax mode  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,  
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and  
automatically receives the fax.  
To set up the DRPD mode:  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
To change the number of rings, see page 56.  
display and press OK  
.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK  
4. Press the left/right arrow until DRPD Mode appears and press OK  
Waiting Ring appears on the display.  
5. Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to  
place the call from a fax machine.  
6. When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine  
requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
.
Receiving manually in Tel mode  
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing  
Black Start or Color Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote  
machine.  
.
The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to ready mode when the  
reception is completed.  
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed  
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.  
Press OK when DRPD Mode appears and start over from step 4.  
Receiving manually using an extension telephone  
This features works best when you are using an extension telephone  
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive  
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without  
going to the fax machine.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or  
connect the machine to another telephone line.  
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify  
that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed  
to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call  
is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine  
plugged into the EXT socket.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press  
the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the  
remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.  
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last  
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you  
wish. For details about changing the code, see page 56.  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
Receiving automatically in Ans/Fax mode  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket  
on the back of your machine.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict  
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure  
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory. When the mode is  
deactivated, any stored faxes are printed.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message  
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it  
automatically starts to receive the fax.  
Activating secure receiving mode  
1. Press Fax.  
If you have set your machine to Ans/Fax mode and your  
answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is  
connected to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into  
Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.  
2. Press Menu ( ) and then press OK when Fax Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display.  
If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set  
the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
If you are in Tel mode (manual reception) when the answering  
machine is connected to your machine, you must switch off the  
answering machine, or the outgoing message from the answering  
machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Secure Receive appears and press OK  
4. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK  
5. Enter a four-digit password you want to use and press OK  
.
.
.
You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a  
password, but cannot protect your faxes.  
Faxing_ 53  
                             
6. Re-enter the password to confirm it and press OK  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
.
9. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow  
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display  
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  
memory.  
When a fax is received in secure receiving mode, your machine stores it in  
memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax  
received.  
10. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
pages. Load another original and press OK.  
Printing received faxes  
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Print appears and press OK  
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the  
order in which you entered them.  
.
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK  
.
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.  
Sending a delayed fax  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be  
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
Deactivating secure receiving mode  
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Off appears and press OK  
1. Press Fax  
.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See  
.
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK  
.
The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in  
memory.  
4. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
page 51.  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Delay Send appears and press OK  
6. Enter the number of the receiving machine using the number keypad.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers. You can enter Group  
Dial Number using Address Book Button.For details, see page 57.  
Receiving faxes in memory  
.
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you  
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or  
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon  
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
7. Press OK to confirm the number. The display asks you to enter another  
Also, your machine receives faxes and stores them in its memory when  
there is no paper in the tray or no toner in the installed toner cartridge.  
fax number to which to send the document.  
8. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
steps 6 and 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
OTHER WAYS TO FAX  
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another  
group dial numbers anymore.  
Sending a fax to multiple destinations  
9. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow  
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
10. Enter the job name you want and press OK.  
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
11. Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK, or Black Start.  
You can use the Multiple Send feature, which allows you to send a fax to  
multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to  
a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased  
from memory. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at  
that time on the following day.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display  
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  
memory.  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Multi Send appears and press OK  
6. Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK  
.
12. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK.  
.
.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you  
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers. You can enter Group  
Dial Number using Address Book Button. For details, see page 57.  
7. Enter the second fax number and press OK.  
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.  
8. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
Adding pages to a delayed fax  
You can add pages to the delayed transmissions previously reserved in  
your machine’s memory.  
steps 6 and 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
1. Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings.  
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another  
group dial numbers anymore.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Add Page appears.  
54 _Faxing  
               
4. Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and  
press OK.  
7. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent  
and press OK.  
The machine scans the original into memory and shows the total  
number of pages and the number of the added pages.  
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax  
machine.  
Canceling a delayed fax  
Forwarding sent faxes to email address  
1. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Cancel Job appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and  
You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a  
specified destination, in addition to the email address you entered.  
1. Press Fax.  
press OK.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears.  
The selected fax is deleted from memory.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select On and press OK.  
7. Enter your email address and press OK.  
8. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.  
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email  
address.  
Sending a priority fax  
Using the Priority Fax feature, a high priority fax can be sent ahead of  
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately  
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority  
transmission will interrupt a Multiple Send operation between stations (i.e.,  
when the transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station B  
begins) or between redial attempts.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See  
Forwarding received faxes to another fax machine  
You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to another fax  
number during a specified time period. When a fax arrives at your  
machine, it is stored in memory. Then, the machine dials the fax number  
that you have specified and sends the fax.  
1. Press Fax.  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Priority Send appears and press OK.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Fax appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Enter the number of the receiving machine.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.  
For details, see page 57.  
7. Press OK to confirm the number.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  
completed, select Forward&Print.  
8. Enter the job name you want and press OK.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display  
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  
memory.  
7. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent  
and press OK.  
9. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK.  
8. Enter the starting time and press OK.  
9. Enter the ending time and press OK.  
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
The machine shows the number being dialed and begins sending the  
fax.  
10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax  
machine.  
Forwarding received faxes to email address  
You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to the email  
address you entered.  
Forwarding faxes  
You can forward your incoming and outgoing faxes to another fax machine  
or email address.  
1. Press Fax.  
Forwarding sent faxes to another fax machine  
You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a  
specified destination, in addition to the fax numbers you entered.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  
completed, select Forward&Print.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Fax appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select On and press OK.  
7. Enter your email address and press OK.  
8. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.  
Faxing_ 55  
         
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email  
address.  
OPTION  
Dial Mode  
DESCRIPTION  
This setting may not be available depending on  
your country. If you cannot reach this option, your  
machine does not support this feature.  
FAX SETUP  
You can set the dial mode for your machine to  
either tone dialling or pulse dialling. If you have a  
public telephone system or a private branch  
exchnage(PBX) system, you may need to select  
Pulse. Contact your local telephone company if  
you are not sure which dial mode to use.  
If you select Pulse, some phone system features  
might not be available. It can also take longer to  
dial a fax or phone number.  
Changing the fax setup options  
Your machine provides you with various user-selectable options for setting  
up the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences  
and needs.  
To change the fax setup options:  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
Receiving options  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow to select Sending or Receiving and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the menu item you want appears and  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
press OK.  
Receive Mode  
You can select the default fax receiving mode. For  
details on receiving faxes in each mode, see page  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears or enter the  
value for the option you have selected, and press OK.  
6. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 5.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Ring to Answer  
You can specify the number of times the machine  
rings before answering an incoming call.  
Sending options  
Stamp RCV  
Name  
This option allows the machine to automatically  
print the page number, and the date and time of  
reception at the bottom of each page of a  
received fax.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Redial Times  
You can specify the number of redial attempts. If  
Rcv Start Code  
Auto Reduction  
This code allows you to initiate fax reception from  
an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket  
on the back of the machine. If you pick up the  
extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the  
code. It is preset to *9* at the factory.  
you enter 0, the machine will not redial.  
Redial Term  
Prefix Dial  
Your machine can automatically redial a remote  
fax machine if it was busy. You can set an interval  
between attempts.  
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as  
or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray,  
the machine can reduce the size of the original to  
fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine.  
Turn on this feature if you want to automatically  
reduce an incoming page.  
With this feature set to Off, the machine cannot  
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The  
original will be divided and printed in actual size  
on two or more pages.  
You can set a prefix of up to five digits. This  
number dials before any automatic dial number is  
started. It is useful for accessing a PABX  
exchange.  
ECM Mode  
This mode helps with poor line quality and makes  
sure any faxes you send are sent smoothly to any  
other ECM-equipped fax machine. Sending a fax  
using ECM may take more time.  
Send Report  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation  
report showing whether a transmission was  
successful, how many pages were sent, and  
more. The available options are On, Off, and On-  
Error, which prints only when a transmission is  
not successful.  
Discard Size  
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as  
or longer than the paper in your machine, you can  
set the machine to discard a specific length from  
the end of the received fax. The machine will print  
the received fax on one or more sheets of paper,  
minus the data that would have been on the  
specified discard segment.  
When the received fax contains pages larger than  
the paper in your machine, and Auto Reduction  
has been turned on, the machine will reduce the  
fax to fit on the existing paper, and nothing will be  
discarded.  
Image TCR  
This function allows users to know what fax  
messages have been sent by showing sent  
messages in the transmission report.  
The first page of the message is turned into an  
image file than is printed on the transmission  
report so the users can see what messages have  
been sent.  
However, you can not use this function when  
sending fax without saving the data in the  
memory.  
56 _Faxing  
               
Setting up Address Book  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most  
frequently. Your machine provides you with the following features for setting  
up Address Book:  
Junk Fax Setup  
This setting may not be available depending on  
your country. Using this feature, the system will  
not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose  
numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax  
numbers. This feature is useful for blocking any  
unwanted faxes.  
Speed buttons  
Speed/Group dial numbers  
Before beginning to store fax numbers, make sure that your machine  
is in Fax mode.  
When you turn on this feature, you can access the  
following options to set junk fax numbers.  
Speed buttons  
Add: Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers.  
Delete: Allows you to delete the desired junk  
fax number.  
The 15 speed buttons on the control panel lets you store frequently-used  
fax numbers. You will be able to enter a fax number with the touch of a  
button. By utilizing the Shift button, you can store up to 30 numbers on  
the speed buttons.  
There are two ways to assign numbers to speed buttons. Examine the  
procedures below and use the appropriate way which you prefer:  
Delete All: Allows you to delete all junk fax  
numbers.  
DRPD Mode  
Duplex Print  
This mode enables a user to use a single  
telephone line to answer several different  
telephone numbers. In this menu, you can set the  
machine to recognize which ring patterns to  
answer. For details about this feature, see page  
Registering after pressing a speed button  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press one of the speed buttons.  
3. Press OK when Yes appears.  
4. Enter the name you want and press OK.  
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.  
5. Enter the fax number you want to store and press OK.  
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a  
book.  
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by  
flipping like a note pad.  
Off: Prints received fax on one sides of a  
paper.  
Registering after entering a number first  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Enter the fax number you want to store.  
3. Press one of the speed buttons.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears.  
Changing the default document settings  
The fax options, including resolution and darkness, can be set to the most  
frequently used modes. When you send a fax, the default settings are used  
if they are not changed by using the corresponding button and menu.  
If you press a speed button already assigned, the display asks if  
you want to overwrite. Press OK to confirm Yes and continue. To  
start over with another speed button, select No.  
1. Press Fax.  
5. Enter the name you want and press OK.  
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.  
6. Press OK to confirm the number.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Resolution appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the resolution you want appears and press  
Using speed buttons  
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax:  
OK.  
To retrieve a number from speed buttons 1 to 15, press the  
corresponding speed button and press OK.  
To retrieve a number from speed buttons 16 to 30, press Shift and  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the darkness you want appears and press  
then the corresponding speed button, and press OK.  
OK.  
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Speed dial numbers  
You can store up to 240 frequently-used fax numbers in speed dial  
numbers.  
Printing sent fax report automatically  
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the  
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.  
Registering a speed dial number  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Speed Dial appears.  
4. Enter a speed dial number between 0 and 239 and press OK.  
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display  
shows the name to allow you to change it. To start over with another  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Auto Report appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
speed dial number, press Back (  
).  
5. Enter the name you want and press OK.  
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.  
6. Enter the fax number you want and press OK.  
Faxing_ 57  
             
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Editing speed dial numbers  
Using group dial numbers  
1. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
To use a group dial entry, you need to search for and select it from  
memory.  
the display and press OK.  
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax,  
2. Press OK when Speed Dial appears.  
3. Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
4. Change the name and press OK.  
press Address Book. See below.  
Searching Address Book for an entry  
5. Change the fax number and press OK.  
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either  
scan from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first  
letters of the name associated with the number.  
Using speed dial numbers  
Searching sequentially through the memory  
1. If necessary, press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until Search & Dial appears on the bottom line  
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a  
fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you  
want.  
of the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when All appears.  
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the  
corresponding digit button on the number keypad.  
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit  
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.  
You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the name and number you want  
appears. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire  
memory in alphabetical order.  
Book. See page 58.  
Group dial numbers  
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you  
can group these destinations and set them under a group dial number.  
You can then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the  
destinations within the group. You can set up to 200 (0 through 199)  
group dial numbers using the destination’s existing speed dial numbers.  
Searching with a particular first letter  
1. If necessary, press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until Search & Dial appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
Registering a group dial number  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
appears and press OK  
.
4. Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.  
5. Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press  
the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.  
4. Enter a group dial number between 0 and 199 and press OK.  
5. Enter a speed dial number and press OK.  
OK.  
Deleting a Address Book entry  
You can delete entries in Address Book one by one.  
1. Press Address Book until Delete appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the searching method you want  
appears and press OK.  
6. Press OK when speed dial information appears correctly.  
7. Press OK when Yes appears.  
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to include other speed dial numbers into the  
group.  
9. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the  
Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all  
entries in Address Book.  
Editing a group dial number  
Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the  
name.  
You can delete a specific entry from a group or add a new number to the  
selected group.  
1. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press  
OK.  
the display and press OK.  
Or, enter the first letters and press OK. Press the left/right arrow until  
the name you want appears and press OK.  
5. Press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.  
3. Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
4. Enter the speed dial number you want to add or delete and press  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm the deletion.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
OK.  
If you entered a new speed dial number, Add? appears.  
If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group, Delete?  
appears.  
Printing Address Book  
1. You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.  
5. Press OK to add or delete the number.  
1. Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to add or delete more numbers and  
display.  
repeat steps 4 and 5.  
2. Press OK. A list showing your speed button settings, and speed dial  
7. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the  
and group dial entries prints out.  
Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
58 _Faxing  
   
using USB flash memory  
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the front of your  
machine.  
ABOUT USB MEMORY  
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to  
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded  
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you  
want to store or move.  
You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device:  
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.  
Print data stored on a USB memory device.  
Back up Address Book/ Phone Book entries and the system settings  
of your machine. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-  
6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
Format the USB memory device.  
Check the available memory space.  
PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB  
V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory  
devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.  
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.  
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type  
connector.  
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in  
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The  
machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s  
misuse.  
If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security  
settings and password settings, your machine may not  
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see the  
device’s User’s Guide.  
SCANNING TO A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB  
memory device. There are two ways of doing this: you can scan to the  
device using the default settings, or you can customize your own scan  
settings.  
Use only a metal/shielded USB memory device.  
Scanning  
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see page 32.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
4. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
5. Press OK, Color Start or Black Start when USB appears.  
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as  
Your machine begins scanning the original, and then asks if you want to  
scan another page.  
Using USB flash memory_ 59  
               
6. Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages. Load an original and  
press Color Start or Black Start.  
3. If you selected a file, skip to the next step.  
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want  
appears.  
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as  
customized. See “Customizing Scan to USB” on page 60.  
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or  
enter the number.  
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from  
the machine.  
5. Press OK, Color Start or Black Start to start printing the selected file.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
OK or Color Start: Color print  
Black Start: Black and White print  
Customizing Scan to USB  
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.  
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to  
USB job.  
1. Press Scan/Email.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
Can choose paper size and tray when printing. See "Setting the paper  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when USB Memory appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setting option you want appears and  
press OK.  
You can set the following options:  
BACKING UP DATA  
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power  
failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect your Address Book  
entries and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB  
memory device. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
Scan Size: Sets the image size.  
Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.  
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.  
Scan Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,  
you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format.  
Backing up data  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.  
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple  
pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in  
Scan Color.  
machine.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.  
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Export Setting appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears.  
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
You can change the default scan settings. For details, see page 47.  
Address Book: Backs up all Address Book entries.  
Setup Data: Backs up all system settings.  
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
6. Press OK to begin backing up the data.  
The data is backed up to the USB memory.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print  
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files.  
Direct Print option supported file types:  
PRN: Samsung PCL 6 compatible.  
Restoring data  
1. Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to  
PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when  
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather  
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be  
printed directly from USB memory. See the Software Section to learn  
how to create a PRN file.  
the USB memory port.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
BMP: BMP Uncompressed  
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
JPEG: JPEG Baseline  
PDF: PDF 1.4 and below  
3. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Import Setting appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the data type you want appears and press  
OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the file containing the data you want to  
restore appears and press OK.  
7. Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.  
To print a document from a USB memory device:  
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine. If one has already been inserted, press USB Print  
.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and  
press OK.  
If you see D in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or  
folders in the selected folder.  
60 _Using USB flash memory  
               
MANAGING USB MEMORY  
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or  
all at once by reformatting the device.  
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot  
be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data  
before deleting it.  
Deleting an image file  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine.  
2. Press Scan/Email.  
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.  
5. Press OK when Delete appears.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and  
press OK.  
If you see D in the front of a folder name, there are one or more  
files or folders in the selected folder.  
If you selected a file, the display shows the size of the file for about  
2 seconds. Go to the next step.  
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want to  
delete appears and press OK.  
7. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.  
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Formatting a USB memory device  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine.  
2. Press Scan/Email.  
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Format appears and press OK.  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Viewing the USB memory status  
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and  
saving documents.  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine.  
2. Press Scan/Email.  
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK.  
The available memory space appears on the display.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to the ready mode.  
Using USB flash memory_ 61  
         
maintenance  
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.  
This chapter includes:  
Replacing the toner cartridge  
PRINTING REPORTS  
REPORT/LIST  
DESCRIPTION  
Your machine can provide various reports with useful information you will  
need. The following reports are available:  
NetScan Report  
This report shows information for the Network Scan  
records including IP address, time and date, the  
number of pages scanned, and results. This report is  
automatically printed every 50 network scan jobs.  
Some reports may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
User Auth List  
This list shows authorized users who are allowed to  
use the email function.  
REPORT/LIST  
Configuration  
DESCRIPTION  
PCL Font List  
PS3 Font List  
Stored Job  
You can print the PCL font list.  
You can print the PS3 font list.  
This list shows the status of the user-selectable  
options. You may print this list to confirm your  
changes after changing settings.  
This list shows the current status of stored job on  
HDD.  
Supplies Info  
Address Book  
This list shows the current status of consumables  
in your machine.  
Completed Job  
Net Auth Log  
The Completed Job page shows the list of  
completed print jobs. The list contains up to 50 files  
from the latest print jobs.  
This list shows all of the fax numbers and email  
addresses currently stored in the machine’s  
memory.  
This list shows users and their IDs who logged in  
the domain.  
Send Report  
This report shows the fax number, the number of  
pages, the elapsed time of the job, the  
communication mode, and the communication  
results for a particular fax job.  
You can set up your machine to automatically print  
a transmission confirmation report after each fax  
job. See page 56.  
Printing a report  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Report appears and press OK.  
Sent Report  
This report shows information on the faxes and  
emails you have recently sent.  
You can set the machine to automatically print this  
report every 50 communications. See page 56.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears  
and press OK.  
To print all reports and lists, select All Report.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing.  
Fax RCV Report  
Schedule Jobs  
Junk Fax Report  
This report shows information on the faxes you  
have recently received.  
The selected information prints out.  
ADJUSTING THE COLOR CONTRAST  
Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting.  
This list shows the documents currently stored for  
delayed faxes along with the starting time and type  
of each operation.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Maintenance appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Color appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the menu you want appears on display  
This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk  
fax numbers. To add or delete numbers to or from  
this list, access the Junk Fax Setup menu.  
See page 56.  
and press OK.  
Network Info.  
This list shows information on your machine’s  
network connection and configuration.  
Custom Color: Allows you to adjust contrast color by color. Default  
optimizes color automatically. Manual Adjust allows you to  
manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge. Default setting  
is recommended for getting best color quality.  
Auto Color Reg.: Allows you to adjust the position of print color  
texts or graphics to match the original file on your screen.  
62 _Maintenance  
         
If you have moved the machine, it is strongly recommended to operate  
this menu manually.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE  
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below  
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality  
problems occur.  
CLEARING MEMORY  
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s memory.  
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials  
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong  
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.  
If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we  
recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to  
clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blown into the air may  
be harmful.  
For CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX users, before clearing  
the memory, make sure that all fax jobs have been completed, or you  
will lose those jobs.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want to clear appears.  
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen  
the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or  
into the machine.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Cleaning the inside  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate  
inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as  
toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears or  
reduces these problems.  
OPTIONS  
DESCRIPTION  
All Settings  
Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all  
of your settings to the factory default.  
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to  
Fax Setup  
Restores all of the fax options to the factory default.  
cool down.  
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
Copy Setup  
Restores all of the copy options to the factory  
default.  
Scan Setup  
System Setup  
Network  
Restores all of the scan options to the factory  
default.  
Restores all of the system options to the factory  
default.  
Restores all of the network options to the factory  
default.  
Address Book  
Clears all of the fax number and email address  
entries stored in memory.  
Sent Report  
Clears all records of sent faxes and emails.  
Clears all records of received faxes.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of the  
toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use the  
handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
Fax RCV Report  
NetScan Report  
Clears the information on network scan sessions in  
memory.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears.  
5. Press OK again to confirm clearing.  
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to clear another item.  
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Maintenance_ 63  
             
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  
5. With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the  
cartridge from the machine.  
toner cartridges area and their cavities.  
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the  
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The  
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  
skin.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
6. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the cartridge compartment,  
and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotten black.  
When you open the front cover and work inside the machine, it is  
highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.  
Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.  
4. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.  
Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine.  
7. Reinstall all the compartments into the machine, and close the front  
cover.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
8. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on  
64 _Maintenance  
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We  
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the  
day, as needed.  
MAINTAINING THE CARTRIDGE  
Toner cartridge storage  
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,  
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the  
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and  
longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.  
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF (or ADF) glass until it  
is clean and dry.  
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;  
this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The  
toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until  
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of  
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.  
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful  
shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is  
removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:  
Inside the protective bag from the original package  
Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end)  
Do not store consumables in;  
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).  
- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.  
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.  
- Direct sunlight or room light.  
1 Scanner lid  
2 Scanner glass  
3 White sheet  
4 DADF (or ADF)  
glass  
- Dusty places.  
- A car for a long period of time.  
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.  
- An environment with salty air.  
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean  
and dry.  
5. Close the scanner lid.  
Handling instructions  
Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.  
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.  
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this  
can cause internal damage and toner spillage.  
Use of Non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge  
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-  
Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store  
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.  
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the  
machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-  
Samsung brand toner cartridge.  
Estimated cartridge life  
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the  
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may  
vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating  
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,  
if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you  
may need to change the cartridge more often.  
Maintenance_ 65  
               
2. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  
Redistributing toner  
cartridge from the machine.  
When a toner is low, faded or light areas may appear. It is possible that  
colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of  
toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner. You  
can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner.  
The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on  
the display.  
The SmartPanel program window appears on the computer telling you  
which color cartridge is low on toner.  
1. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the  
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The  
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  
skin.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of the  
toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use the  
handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
When you open the front cover and work inside the machine, it is  
highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.  
Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.  
3. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side  
to side to evenly distribute the toner.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry  
cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into  
fabric.  
66 _Maintenance  
   
4. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine.  
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  
cartridge from the machine.  
5. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched.  
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the  
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The  
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  
skin.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each  
one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).  
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicates  
which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.  
For the CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX, incoming faxes are  
saved in memory.  
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of  
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "" on page 91.)  
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.  
When you open the front cover and work inside the machine, it is  
highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.  
Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.  
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
4. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package.  
Don't use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open  
the toner cartridge package. You could damage the surface of  
the toner cartridge.  
To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light  
for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to  
protect it if necessary.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of  
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use  
the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
Maintenance_ 67  
     
5. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side  
6. Now the Toner Empty message does not appear but the Replace  
Toner message will remain for reminding you that the new cartridge  
needs to be installed for quality.  
to side to evenly distribute the toner.  
Once you have selected On, this setting will be permanently  
written to the memory of the toner cartridge, and this menu will be  
disappeared from the Maintenance menu.  
You can keep printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed, and  
the product support is no longer provided.  
6. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, as shown, and remove the  
REPLACING THE PAPER TRANSFER BELT  
paper covering the toner cartridge by removing the tape.  
The life of the paper transfer belt is approximately 50,000 black and color  
pages. After the life span of the paper transfer belt is complete, you have to  
replace it.  
The transfer belt-related message appears on the display, telling it is  
time for a replacement.  
The SmartPanel program window appears on the computer telling you  
the paper transfer belt needs to be replaced.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
The life span of the paper transfer belt may be affected by operating  
environment, printing interval, media type, and media size.  
7. Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and  
then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge. Insert the cartridge until it  
clicks into place.  
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.  
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
3. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.  
Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine.  
8. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched, and then  
turn the machine on.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
Clearing the Toner Empty message  
When the Toner Empty message appears you can configure not to see this  
message again not to disturb you.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the Scroll buttons until Maintenance appears and press OK.  
3. Press the Scroll buttons until CLR Empty Msg. appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the color menu you want appears on  
display and press OK.  
5. Select On and press OK.  
68 _Maintenance  
   
4. Take a new paper transfer belt out of its package.  
MAINTENANCE PARTS  
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts,  
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following  
condition, the following items will need to be replaced after the specified  
number of pages, or when the life span of each item has expired.  
ITEMS  
YIELD (AVERAGE)  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
Approx. 80,000 pages  
Approx. 70,000 pages  
Fuser unit  
Don't use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open  
the paper transfer belt package. You could damage the  
surface of the paper transfer belt.  
DADF (or ADF) friction pad  
DADF (or ADF) pick-up roller  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
5. Holding the handle on the new paper transfer belt, align it with the slots  
Pick-up roller (Multi-purpose tray,  
FCFa, Optional tray 2)  
on the inside of the front cover.  
Friction pad (Multi-purpose tray,  
FCF, Optional tray 2)  
Approx. 70,000 pages  
a. First cassette feeder (Tray1)  
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized  
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The  
warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after  
their lifespan.  
Checking replaceables  
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the  
number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the  
corresponding parts, if necessary.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
6. Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front cover and  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK.  
firmly seated.  
Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.  
Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.  
ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF.  
Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the  
scanner glass.  
Transfer Belt, Fuser, Tray1 Roller, Tray2 Roller, MP Tray  
Roller: Displays the number of pages printed each item.  
5. If you selected to print a supply information page, press OK to confirm.  
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
7. Close the front cover firmly.  
8. Turn the machine on.  
Maintenance_ 69  
             
For the DADF  
(CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
1. Open the DADF cover.  
Replacing the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad  
You will need to replace the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad when there seems to be  
a consistent problem with paper pickup or when its specified yield is reached.  
2. Remove the DADF rubber pad from the DADF, as shown.  
For the ADF  
(CLX-6200FX only)  
1. Open the ADF cover.  
2. Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller toward the ADF  
and remove the roller from the slot.  
1 DADF rubber  
pad  
3. Insert a new DADF rubber pad into place.  
1 Bushing  
4. Close the DADF cover.  
2 ADF roller  
3. Remove the ADF rubber pad from the ADF, as shown.  
MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE  
WEBSITE  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP  
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Samsung’s  
SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™  
Web Service to:  
View the machine’s device information and check its current status.  
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.  
Change the printer properties.  
Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the  
machine’s status.  
Get support for using the machine.  
1 ADF rubber pad  
4. Insert a new ADF rubber pad into place.  
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:  
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
2. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address  
field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
5. Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push the right  
end of the roller into the right slot. Rotate the bushing on the right  
end of the roller toward the document input tray.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
CHECKING THE MACHINE’S SERIAL NUMBER  
When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website, the  
machine’s serial number may be required.  
You can check the serial number by taking the following steps:  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK.  
4. Check your machine’s serial number.  
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
6. Close the ADF cover.  
70 _Maintenance  
     
troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.  
This chapter includes:  
Solving other problems  
3. Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller toward the ADF  
(1) and remove the roller from the slot (2). Pull the document gently  
to the left and out of the ADF.  
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS  
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.  
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 71.  
Follow the procedures on page 36. Ensure that the adjustable guides  
are positioned correctly.  
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper  
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper types in a tray.  
Use only recommended print media. (See "Setting the paper size and  
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the  
tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.  
CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS  
When an original jams while passing through the DADF (or ADF),  
Document Jam appears on the display.  
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its  
model.  
Input Misfeed  
4. Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push the right  
end of the ADF roller into the right slot (1). Rotate the bushing on  
the right end of the roller toward the document input tray (2).  
For the ADF  
(CLX-6200FX only)  
1. Remove any remaining pages from the ADF.  
2. Open the ADF cover.  
5. Close the ADF cover. Then load the removed page(s), if any, back  
into the ADF.  
1 ADF cover  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or  
mixed paper-type originals.  
Troubleshooting_ 71  
           
For the DADF  
Exit misfeed  
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF (or ADF).  
2. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the document  
(CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.  
2. Open the DADF cover.  
output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
1 DADF cover  
3. Load the removed pages back into the DADF (or ADF).  
3. Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF.  
Roller misfeed  
1. Open the scanner lid.  
2. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by  
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its  
model.  
4. Close the DADF cover. Then load the removed pages, if any, back  
into the DADF.  
3. Close the scanner lid. Then load the removed pages back into the DADF  
(or ADF).  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or  
mixed paper-type originals.  
72 _Troubleshooting  
   
2. Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below.  
CLEARING PAPER JAMS  
Go to step 7.  
When a paper jam occurs, the warning message appears on the display  
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
MESSAGE  
MP Tray  
LOCATION OF JAM  
GO TO  
Page 74  
In the multi purpose tray  
Paper Jam 0  
Tray 2  
In the optional tray  
Page 77  
Paper jam 0  
Paper Jam 0  
Open/Close Door  
In the paper feed area or  
inside the machine  
Paper Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
Inside the machine  
Paper Jam 2  
Check Inside  
Inside the machine or in  
the fuser area  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling, and go to step 3.  
Reverse Jam 0  
Check Inside  
In the fuser area or in the  
cover of reverse unit area  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of  
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material.  
Use the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching  
this area.  
Reverse Jam 1  
Check Inside  
In the rear cover or in the  
cover of reverse unit area  
Remove Paper  
in Rear Cover  
Inside rear cover  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes,  
the OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause  
damage to the OPC drum. Close the front cover should the  
installation need to be halted for any reason.  
Duplex Jam 0  
Check Inside  
Inside the machine  
Duplex Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
In the paper feed area or  
inside the machine  
3. Close the front cover.  
4. Pull the tray open.  
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options  
or models.  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and  
slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the  
jam.  
In the paper feed area  
If paper is jammed in the paper feed area, follow the next steps to release  
the jammed paper.  
1. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
5. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out as shown  
below.  
Troubleshooting_ 73  
       
6. To replace the tray, lower the rear edge, align it with the slot, and slide it  
5. Pull the paper out gently.  
into the machine.  
6. Replace the tray.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 8.  
7. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
7. Open the front cover and close it. The machine will resume printing.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
When you print using the Multi-purpose Tray and the machine detects that  
there is either no paper or that the paper has been improperly loaded, follow  
the next steps to release the jammed paper.  
1. Check if the paper is stuck in the feeding area, and if so, pull it out gently  
and slowly.  
8. Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown. To avoid  
tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 2.  
2. Close the multi-purpose tray.  
3. Pull the tray out.  
4. Open the inner cover while you are pushing the lever with two hands.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of  
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use  
the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
9. Close the front cover firmly. The machine will resume printing.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
74 _Troubleshooting  
 
4. Pull up the paper jam lever to loose the fusing part of the fuser unit and  
In the fuser unit area  
If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area, follow the next steps to release the  
jammed paper.  
carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine.  
1. Open the scan unit.  
5. Press down the paper jam lever to fasten the fusing part.  
6. Close the inner cover.  
2. Open the inner cover using the handle.  
7. Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely  
closed. Make sure that it is securely latched.  
Be careful not to pinch your fingers!  
3. Open the inner cover using the handle on it and carefully take the  
jammed paper out of the machine.  
If the scan unit is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could  
cause burns! The fuser's operating temperature is 180  
Take care when removing paper from the machine.  
°C (356°F).  
Troubleshooting_ 75  
 
If there is any resistance removing the paper or difficulty picking up  
jammed paper, stop pulling and turn the release knob to the direction as  
shown to remove the misfed paper.  
In the paper exit area  
If paper is jammed in the paper exit area, follow the next steps to release  
the jammed paper.  
1. If a long portion of the paper is visible, pull it straight out. Open and close  
the front cover firmly. The machine will resume printing.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 2.  
2. Open the scan unit.  
4. Close the cover of reverse unit.  
5. Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely  
closed. Make sure that it is securely latched.  
Be careful not to pinch your fingers!  
3. Open the cover of reverse unit using the handle on it and carefully take  
If the scan unit is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
the jammed paper out of the machine.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 6.  
6. Open the rear cover and carefully take the jammed paper out of the  
machine.  
76 _Troubleshooting  
 
7. Close the rear cover.  
5. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the  
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
In the optional tray  
If paper is jammed in the optional Tray, follow the next steps to release the  
jammed paper.  
1. Pull the optional Tray open. After you pull it all the way out, lift up the  
front part of the tray slightly to release the tray from the machine.  
6. Close the front cover firmly. The machine will resume printing.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
2. If you see the jammed paper, remove the paper from the machine by  
gently pulling it straight out as shown below.  
3. Slide the tray back into the machine.  
4. Open the front cover.  
Troubleshooting_ 77  
 
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
Cancel?  
MEANING  
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s  
status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’  
meaning and correct the problem if necessary. Messages and their  
meanings are listed in alphabetical order.  
Your machine’s  
memory has become  
full while trying to  
store an original into  
memory.  
To cancel the fax job,  
press the OK button to  
accept Yes.  
W Yes X  
If you want to send those  
pages that have been  
successfully stored,  
press the OK button to  
accept No. You should  
send the remaining  
pages later, when  
If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the  
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.  
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models.  
xxx indicates the media type.  
yyy indicates the tray.  
memory is available.  
Connection Error  
Connection Failed  
Connection with the  
SMTP server failed.  
Check the server  
settings and the network  
cable.  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
[COMM. Error]  
The machine has a  
communication  
problem.  
Ask the sender to try  
again.  
The protocol you have Check the protocol or  
entered is not  
supported or server  
port is wrong.  
server port.  
[Incompatible]  
[Line Error]  
The machine has  
received a fax from  
which is registered as  
a junk fax.  
The received fax data  
will be deleted.  
Reconfirm junk fax  
setup. See page 56  
DADF Cover  
Open Error  
The DADF cover is  
not securely latched.  
Close the DADF cover  
until it locks into place.  
Your machine cannot  
connect with the  
Try again. If the problem  
persists, wait an hour or  
receiving fax machine so for the line to clear  
Data Read Fail  
Check USB Mem.  
Time expired while  
reading data.  
Try again.  
or has lost contact  
because of a problem  
with the phone line.  
and try again.  
Or, turn the ECM mode  
on. See page 56.  
Data Write Fail  
Check USB Mem.  
Storing to the USB  
memory failed.  
Check the available USB  
memory space.  
Document Jam  
The loaded original  
has jammed in the  
DADF (or ADF).  
Clear the jam. See page  
[No Answer]  
The receiving fax  
machine has not  
answered after  
several redial  
attempts.  
Try again. Make sure  
that the receiving  
machine is operational.  
Door Open/Check  
Transfer Belt  
The front cover is not  
securely latched.  
Close the cover until it  
locks into place.  
[Stop Pressed]  
Stop/Clear has been  
pressed during an  
operation.  
Try again.  
Duplex Jam 0  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing.  
This is applicable only  
to machines with this  
feature.  
Clear the jam.  
See page 73.  
[yyy]  
Paper Empty  
There is no paper in  
the tray.  
Load paper in the tray.  
Load the correct paper in  
Duplex Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing.  
This is applicable only  
to machines with this  
feature.  
Clear the jam.  
See page 73.  
[yyy]  
Paper Mismatch  
The paper size  
specified in the printer the tray.  
properties does not  
match the paper you  
are loading.  
Enter Again  
You entered an  
unavailable item.  
Enter the correct item  
again.  
[yyy]  
Cassette Out  
The tray cassette is  
not properly closed.  
To close the tray, lower  
the rear edge, align it  
with the slot, and slide it  
into the printer.  
File Access  
Denied  
Login to the network  
server was  
successful. However,  
access to the file on  
the network server  
was denied.  
Change the server  
settings.  
Adjusting...  
Registration  
The machine is  
adjusting the color  
registration  
Wait a few minutes.  
Authentication  
Failure  
The ID or password  
you entered is  
incorrect.  
Enter the correct ID or  
password.  
File Format  
Not Supported  
The selected file  
format is not  
supported.  
Use the correct file  
format.  
78 _Troubleshooting  
   
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
Install  
MEANING  
File Name Exist  
The file name you  
have entered already  
exists.  
Enter a different file  
name.  
The corresponding  
Install the part into your  
part of the machine is machine.  
not installed.  
[xxx]  
File Name  
Over Limit  
The file names you  
can use are from  
doc001 to doc999.  
However, all file  
names are used  
already.  
Delete unnecessary  
files.  
Invalid  
[xxx]  
The color part of the  
machine is not for  
your machine.  
Install the a Samsung-  
genuine part designed  
for your machine.  
Install Toner  
The color toner  
cartridge is not  
installed.  
Install the color toner  
cartridge.  
T
Fuser Fan  
Locked  
There is a problem in  
the cooling fan of the  
machine.  
Open and then close the  
front cover.  
Invalid Toner  
The color toner  
cartridge you have  
Install the a Samsung-  
genuine color toner  
T
installed is not for your cartridge designed for  
Global Address  
Not Found  
When the device is  
unable to locate the  
given address of the  
Global server.  
Check the search ID.  
machine.  
your machine.  
Invalid Server  
Address  
The server address  
you have entered is  
invalid.  
Enter the correct server  
address.  
Global Query  
Size Exceeded  
This is an error  
There are too many  
message and displays search results. Refine  
when the global query your search by entering  
IP Conflict  
Line Busy  
Low Power  
The network IP  
Check the IP address  
and reset it if necessary.  
See page 25.  
address you have set  
is being used by  
someone else.  
size has been  
exceeded.  
more letters.  
Contact a LDAP server  
administrator.  
The receiving fax  
machine did not  
answer or the line is  
already engaged.  
Try again after a few  
minutes.  
Global Server  
Auth Failed  
When there is a  
Check the authentication  
account and password.  
authentication fail  
while connecting to  
the global server this  
message displays.  
The machine is in the  
previous stage of the  
power save mode.  
When data is received, it  
switches to on-line  
automatically.  
Global Server  
Not Configured  
When no global server Check the LDAP server  
is configured, this  
message displays.  
configuration settings.  
Mail Exceeds  
Server Support  
The mail size is larger Divide your mail or  
than the supported  
reduce the resolution.  
Global Server  
Not Found  
When the device is  
unable to find the  
Global server.  
Check the LDAP server  
address, The LDAP  
server address is  
incorrect, or the server  
has failed.  
size by SMTP server.  
Main Motor  
Locked  
There is a problem in  
the main motor.  
Open and then close the  
front cover.  
The multi-purpose  
tray is empty in  
manual feed mode.  
Load paper in the multi-  
purpose tray. See page  
Load Manually  
Press Start Key  
Global Server  
Query Timeout  
Network Information  
Center (NIC) failed to  
get the proper  
Check the LDAP server  
setting, LDAP server  
setting is incorrect.  
response from the  
LDAP server within  
specified time.  
Memory Full  
The memory is full.  
Delete unnecessary fax  
jobs and retransmit after  
more memory becomes  
available. Alternatively,  
split the transmission  
into more than one  
operation.  
Global Server  
Comm Error  
This error message  
displays when there is  
a communication error  
between the global  
Try again.  
Contact a LDAP Server  
administrator.  
server and the device.  
MP Tray  
Paper Jam 0  
Paper has jammed in  
the feeding area of the 73.  
multi-purpose tray.  
Clear the jam. See page  
Group Not  
Available  
You have tried to  
Use a speed dial number  
select a group location or dial a number  
number where only a  
single location  
manually using the  
number keypad.  
Network Error  
There is a problem  
with the network.  
Contact your network  
administrator.  
number can be used,  
such as when adding  
locations for a Multiple  
Send operation.  
Troubleshooting_ 79  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
Not Assigned  
The speed button or  
speed dial number  
you tried to use has  
no number assigned  
to it.  
Enter the number  
Refilled Toner  
The toner cartridge  
you have installed is  
not genuine or refilled. cartridge is installed,  
since its characteristics  
may significantly differ  
from the genuine.  
The print quality may get  
poor if the refilled toner  
manually using the  
T
number keypad or store  
the number or address.  
We recommend  
Samsung-genuine color  
toner cartridge.  
Not Available  
Try Again Later  
Can not perform the  
task immediately  
because too many  
tasks are running at  
once.  
Try again when current  
task is completed.  
Replace Toner  
This message  
Replace the toner  
cartridge with a new one.  
See page 66.  
appears between  
Toner Empty and  
Toner Low status.  
T
NonSAMSUNG  
The color toner  
cartridge which the  
arrow indicates is not  
a Samsung-genuine  
cartridge.  
Press OK to toggle  
the message to Stop  
or Continue.  
You can select either  
Stop or Continue with  
the left/right arrow.  
If you select Stop by  
pressing OK on the  
control panel, the  
machine stops printing.  
If you select Continue,  
the machine keeps  
printing, but the quality  
cannot be guaranteed.  
If you do not select any,  
the machine will work as  
Stop is selected.  
Toner  
T
Replace  
[xxx]  
The life of the part  
expires totally.  
Replace the part with a  
new one. Call for  
service.  
Replace  
[xxx] Soon  
The life of the part  
expires soon.  
See page 69 and call for  
service.  
W Stop X  
Retry Redial?  
The machine is  
waiting for a specified immediately redial, or  
time interval to redial  
a previously busy  
station.  
You can press OK to  
Stop/Clear to cancel the  
redial operation.  
Replace the  
corresponding toner  
cartridge with a  
Reverse Jam 0  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed in  
the paper fuser area  
and In the cover of  
reverse unit area.  
Clear the jam. See page  
Samsung-genuine  
cartridge. See page 66.  
One Page is  
Too Large  
Single page data  
exceeds the  
configured mail size.  
Reduce the resolution  
and try again.  
Reverse Jam 1  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed In  
the cover of reverse  
unit area or in the rear  
cover.  
Clear the jam. See page  
Operation  
Not Assigned  
You are in the Add  
Page/Cancel Job  
operation, but there  
are no jobs stored.  
Check the display to see  
if there are any  
scheduled jobs.  
Scanner locked  
The scanner module  
is locked  
Unlock the scanner and  
press Stop/Clear.  
Out-Bin Full  
The output tray of the  
machine is full of  
paper.  
Remove paper.  
Self Diagnostics  
Temperature  
The engine in your  
machine is checking  
problems detected.  
Wait a few minutes.  
Wait a few minutes.  
Paper Jam 0  
Open/Close Door  
Paper has jammed in  
the feeding area of the 73.  
tray.  
Clear the jam. See page  
Self Diagnostics  
LSU  
The LSU (Laser  
Scanning Unit) in your  
machine is checking  
problems detected.  
Paper has jammed  
inside the machine.  
Paper Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
Clear the jam. See page  
75.  
Send Error  
(AUTH)  
There is a problem in  
SMTP authentication. authentication setting.  
Configure the  
Special print media  
has jammed in the  
paper exit area.  
Paper Jam 2  
Check Inside  
Clear the jam. See page  
76.  
Send Error  
(DNS)  
There is a problem in  
DNS.  
Configure the DNS  
setting.  
Power Failure  
Power has turned off  
then on and the  
The job which you were  
trying to do before the  
power failure must be  
Send Error  
(POP3)  
There is a problem in  
POP3.  
Configure the POP3  
setting.  
machine’s memory  
has not been back up. completely re-done.  
Send Error  
(SMTP)  
There is a problem in  
SMTP.  
Change to the available  
server.  
Remove Paper  
in Rear Cover  
Paper has jammed in  
the paper rear cover  
area.  
Clear the jam. See page  
76.  
80 _Troubleshooting  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
Send Error  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
Toner Low  
MEANING  
There is a problem on Configure your network  
Small amount of toner Prepare a new cartridge  
the network interface  
card.  
interface card correctly.  
is left in the cartridge.  
The estimated  
cartridge life of toner  
is close.  
for replacement. You  
may temporarily  
(Wrong Config)  
T
increase the printing  
quality by redistributing  
the toner. (See page 66.)  
Toner Empty  
A toner cartridge has  
almost reached its  
estimated cartridge  
life.  
You can choose among  
Stop, Continue or  
Black Only as shown on  
the control panel. If you  
select Stop, the printer  
stops printing and you  
cannot print any more  
without changing the  
cartridge. If you select  
Continue, the printer  
keeps printing but the  
printing quality cannot  
be guaranteed. If you  
select Black Only, the  
machine prints the data  
in black only.  
T
Tray 2  
Paper jam 0  
Paper has jammed In  
the paper feed area.  
Clear the jam. See page  
73.  
W Stop X  
Samsung  
does not  
Updating Data  
Please Wait...  
This message  
Do not turn the power off  
appears when there is when this message is  
recommend  
a change in the  
system setting or  
when you back up a  
data.  
showing. Changes may  
not be saved and datas  
can be lost.  
using non-  
genuine  
Samsung  
toner cartridge  
such as  
refilled or  
remanufactured.  
Samsung cannot  
guarantee non-  
genuine Samsung  
toner cartridge's  
quality. Service or  
repair required as a  
result of using non-  
genuine Samsung  
toner cartridges will  
not be covered under  
the machine warranty.  
Replace the toner  
cartridge for the best  
print quality when this  
messageappears. Using  
a cartridge beyond this  
stage can result in  
printing quality issues.  
See page 67.  
If the black toner  
cartridge is  
empty, Black  
Only message  
does not appear.  
Toner Exhausted  
A toner cartridge has  
reached its estimated  
cartridge life. The  
printer stops printing.  
Estimated  
Replace the toner  
cartridge. See page 67.  
T
cartridge life  
means the  
expected or  
estimated  
toner cartridge  
life, which  
indicates the  
average capacity of  
print-outs and is  
designed pursuant to  
ISO/IEC 19798. (See  
Specification on page  
99.) The number of  
pages may be  
affected by operating  
environment, printing  
interval, media type,  
and media size. Some  
amount of toner may  
remain in the cartridge  
even when "Toner  
Exhausted" appears  
and the printer stops  
printing.  
Troubleshooting_ 81  
     
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is  
corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.  
Paper feeding  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Paper is jammed  
during printing.  
Clear the paper jam. See page 71.  
Paper sticks  
together.  
Ensure there is not too much paper in the tray.  
The tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper,  
depending on the thickness of your paper.  
Make sure that you are using the correct type  
of paper. See page 38.  
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the  
paper.  
Humid conditions may cause some paper to  
stick together.  
Multiple sheets of  
paper do not feed.  
Different types of paper may be stacked in the  
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and  
weight.  
If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,  
clear the paper jam. See page 71.  
Paper does not feed  
into the machine.  
Remove any obstructions from inside the  
machine.  
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove  
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray.  
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the  
machine. See page 33.  
If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad may require to  
be replaced. See page 69.  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing  
on special materials, use the multi-purpose tray  
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use  
only paper that meets the specifications  
required by the machine. See page 33.  
There may be debris inside the machine. Open  
the front cover and remove the debris.  
If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad may require to  
be replaced. See page 69.  
.
Envelopes skew or  
fail to feed correctly.  
Ensure the paper guides are against both sides of  
the envelopes.  
82 _Troubleshooting  
 
Printing problems  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
A print job is  
extremely slow.  
The job may be very Reduce the complexity of the  
complex.  
page or try adjusting the print  
quality settings.  
The machine  
does not print.  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord  
connections. Check the  
power switch and the power  
source.  
Half the page is  
blank.  
The page orientation Change the page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
in your application. See the  
printer driver help screen.  
The machine is not  
selected as the  
default printer.  
Select Samsung CLX-6200  
Series or CLX-6240 Series  
as your default printer in your  
Windows.  
The paper size and  
the paper size  
settings do not  
match.  
Ensure that the paper size in  
the printer driver settings  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Or, ensure that the paper  
size in the printer driver  
settings matches the paper  
selection in the software  
application settings you use.  
Check the machine for the following:  
The front cover is not closed. Close the cover.  
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. See page  
73.  
No paper is loaded. Load paper. See page 36.  
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the  
toner cartridge.  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect. Try a print job  
that you have already printed  
successfully. If possible,  
attach the cable and the  
machine to another computer  
and try a print job that you  
know works. Finally, try a  
new printer cable.  
If a system error occurs, contact your service  
representative.  
The connection  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect it.  
incomplete.  
cable between the  
computer and the  
machine is not  
connected properly.  
The wrong printer  
Check the application’s  
The connection  
cable between the  
computer and the  
machine is  
If possible, attach the cable  
to another computer that is  
working properly and print a  
job. You can also try using a  
different printer cable.  
driver was selected. printer selection menu to  
ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
defective.  
The software  
application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from  
another application.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer  
setting to make sure that the  
print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has  
more than one port, make  
sure that the machine is  
The operating  
system is  
malfunctioning.  
Exit Windows and reboot the  
computer. Turn the machine  
off and then back on again.  
attached to the correct one.  
Pages print, but  
are blank.  
The toner cartridge  
Redistribute the toner, if  
is defective or out of necessary. See page 65.  
The machine may  
be configured  
incorrectly.  
Check the printer properties  
to ensure that all of the print  
settings are correct.  
toner.  
If necessary, replace the  
toner cartridge.  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that  
it does not contain blank  
pages.  
The printer driver  
may be incorrectly  
installed.  
Repair the printer software.  
See the Software section.  
Some parts, such as Contact a service  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message  
on the control panel to see if  
the machine is indicating a  
system error.  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
defective.  
representative.  
The printer does Incompatibility  
Printing the PDF file as an  
image may solve this  
problem. Turn on Print As  
Image from the Acrobat  
printing options.  
The document size  
is so big that the  
hard disk space of  
the computer is not  
enough to access  
the print job.  
Get more hard disk space  
and print the document  
again.  
between the PDF  
file and the Acrobat  
products.  
not print PDF file  
correctly. Some  
parts of  
graphics, text, or  
illustrations are  
missing.  
It will take longer to  
print when you print a  
PDF file as an image.  
The machine  
selects print  
materials from  
the wrong paper  
source.  
The paper source  
selection in the  
printer properties  
may be incorrect.  
For many software  
applications, the paper  
source selection is found  
under the Thin Paper tab  
within the printer properties.  
Select the correct paper  
source. See the printer driver  
help screen.  
The print quality The resolution of the Reduce the photo size. If you  
photo is very low.  
increase the photo size in the  
software application, the  
resolution will be reduced.  
of photos is not  
good. Images  
are not clear.  
Troubleshooting_ 83  
   
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
CONDITION  
Dropouts  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur  
randomly on the page:  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
If you are under the  
DOS environment,  
the font setting for  
your machine may  
be set incorrectly.  
Suggested solutions: Change  
the font setting. See  
"Changing the font  
A single sheet of paper may be defective.  
Try reprinting the job.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
setting" on page 31.  
The moisture content of the paper is  
uneven or the paper has moist spots on its  
surface. Try a different brand of paper. See  
page 33.  
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing  
processes can cause some areas to reject  
toner. Try a different kind or brand of  
paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and  
set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the  
Software section for details.  
incomplete.  
Before printing,  
the machine  
emits vapor near  
Using damp paper  
can cause vapor  
during printing.  
This is not a problem. Just  
keep printing.  
the output tray.  
The machine  
does not print  
special sized  
paper such as a  
billing paper.  
Paper size and  
Set the correct paper size in  
paper size setting do the Custom in the Paper tab  
not match.  
in the printer propeties. See  
Software section  
.
If these steps do not correct the problem,  
contact a service representative.  
Printing quality problems  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,  
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the  
problem.  
White spots appear on the page:  
White Spots  
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from  
the paper falls to the inner devices within  
the machine, which means the transfer belt  
may be dirty. Clean the inside of your  
machine. Contact a service representative.  
The paper path may need cleaning.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears  
Contact a service representative.  
on the page:  
The toner supply is low. You may be able  
to temporarily extend the toner cartridge  
life. See page 66. If this does not improve  
the print quality, install a new toner  
cartridge.  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The drum inside the toner cartridge has  
probably been scratched. Remove the  
toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
page 66.  
The paper may not meet paper  
specifications; for example, the paper is too  
moist or too rough. See page 33.  
If the entire page is light, the print  
resolution setting is too low. Adjust the print  
resolution. See the help screen of the  
printer driver.  
A combination of faded or smeared defects  
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs  
cleaning.  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,  
contact a service representative.  
If vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the scanner glass and its  
white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit.  
See 65 . If this problem persists, contact a  
service representative.  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,  
contact a service representative.  
Color or Black  
background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
Toner specks  
The paper may not meet specifications; for  
example, the paper is too moist or too  
rough. See page 33.  
The paper path may need cleaning. See  
"Cleaning the inside" on page 63.  
Change to a lighter weight paper. See  
page 33.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Check the machine’s environment: very dry  
(low humidity) or high humidity (higher than  
80% RH) conditions can increase the  
amount of background shading.  
Remove the old toner cartridge and install  
a new one. See page 66.  
84 _Troubleshooting  
CONDITION  
Toner smear  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
Page skew  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Clean the inside of the machine. See page  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. See page  
33.  
Ensure that the paper or other material is  
loaded correctly and the guides are not too  
tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
63.  
Check the paper type and quality. See page  
33.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a  
new one. See page 66.  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side  
of the page at even intervals:  
Curl or wave  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. Both high  
temperature and humidity can cause paper  
curl. See page 33.  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a  
repetitive mark occurs on the page, print a  
cleaning sheet several times to clean the  
cartridge. After the printout, if you still have  
the same problems, remove the toner  
cartridge and install a new one. See page  
66.  
Parts of the machine may have toner on  
them. If the defects occur on the back of  
the page, the problem will likely correct  
itself after a few more pages.  
The fusing assembly may be damaged.  
Contact a service representative.  
Wrinkles or creases  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. See page  
33.  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner  
randomly distributed on the printed page.  
The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Do not open  
packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
If background scatter occurs on an  
envelope, change the printing layout to  
avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side.  
Printing on seams can cause problems.  
If background scatter covers the entire  
surface area of a printed page, adjust the  
print resolution through your software  
application or the printer properties.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of  
the machine. See page 63.  
A
Misformed  
characters  
If characters are improperly formed and  
producing hollow images, the paper stock  
may be too slick. Try a different paper. See  
page 33.  
If characters are improperly formed and  
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit  
may need service. For service, contact a  
service representative.  
Solid Color or  
Black pages  
The toner cartridge may not be installed  
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert  
it.  
The toner cartridge may be defective and  
need replacing. Remove the toner cartridge  
and install a new one. See page 66.  
The machine may require repair. Contact a  
service representative.  
Troubleshooting_ 85  
   
CONDITION  
Loose toner  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Clean the inside of the machine. See page  
63.  
Check the paper type and quality. See page  
33.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a  
new one. See page 66.  
If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Smears, lines,  
marks, or spots  
appears on copies.  
If defects are on the original, press  
Darkness to lighten the background of your  
copies.  
If no defects are on the original, clean the  
scan unit. See page 65.  
Copy image is  
skewed.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF (or  
ADF).  
Check that the copy paper is loaded  
correctly.  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of  
characters that should be solid black:  
Blank copies print  
out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF (or  
ADF).  
If you are using transparencies, try another  
type of transparency. Because of the  
composition of transparencies, some  
character voids are normal.  
You may be printing on the wrong surface  
of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it  
around.  
Image rubs off the  
copy easily.  
Replace the paper in the tray with paper  
from a new package.  
A
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper  
in the machine for extended periods of  
time.  
The paper may not meet paper  
specifications. See page 33.  
Frequent copy paper  
jams occur.  
Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in  
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with  
a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper  
guides, if necessary.  
Ensure that the paper is the proper paper  
weight. 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper is  
recommended.  
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy  
paper remaining in the machine after a  
paper jam has been cleared.  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears  
appear:  
The toner cartridge may be installed  
improperly. Remove the cartridge and  
reinsert it.  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a  
new one. See page 66.  
If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Toner cartridge  
produces fewer  
copies than expected  
before running out of  
toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids,  
or heavy lines. For example, your originals  
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
The machine may be turned on and off  
frequently.  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not  
feed into the machine:  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray.  
Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and  
set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the  
Software section for details.  
The scanner lid may be left open while  
copies are being made.  
An unknown image Your printer is probably being used at an  
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.  
The high altitude may affect the print quality  
such as loose toner or light imaging. You can  
set this option through Printer Settings Utility  
or Printer tab in printer driver’s properties. See  
page 28.  
repetitively appears  
on a next few  
sheets or loose  
toner, light print, or  
contamination  
occurs.  
Copying problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Copies are too light  
or too dark.  
Use Darkness to darken or lighten the  
background of the copies.  
86 _Troubleshooting  
           
Scanning problems  
Samsung Scan Manager problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The scanner does  
not work.  
Make sure that you place the original to be  
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or  
face up in the DADF (or ADF).  
There may not be enough available memory  
to hold the document you want to scan. Try  
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try  
lowering the scan resolution rate.  
I cannot use the  
Samsung Scan  
Manager.  
Check your operating system. Supporting  
operating systems are Windows 2000/XP/  
Vista.  
Fax problems  
(CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)  
Check that the USB cable is connected  
properly.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Make sure that the USB cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known  
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.  
Check that the scanner is configured  
correctly. Check scan setting in the  
SmarThru Configuration or the application  
you want to use to make certain that the  
scanner job is being sent to the correct port.  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display and the  
buttons are not  
working.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power to the electrical  
outlet.  
No dial tone sounds.  
Check that the phone line is connected  
properly.  
Check that the phone socket in the wall is  
The unit scans very  
slowly.  
Check if the machine is printing received  
data. If so, scan the document after the  
received data has been printed.  
working by plugging in another phone.  
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
Communication speed slows in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory  
required to analyze and reproduce the  
scanned image. Set your computer to the  
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It  
will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your  
computer user’s guide.  
The numbers stored  
in memory do not  
dial correctly.  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in  
memory correctly. Print a Phone Book list,  
referring to page 58.  
The original does not  
feed into the  
machine.  
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and  
you are putting it in correctly. Check that the  
original is the right size, not too thick or thin  
Make sure that the DADF (or ADF) is firmly  
closed.  
The ADF rubber pad may need to be  
replaced. See page 69.  
Message appears on  
your computer  
screen:  
There may be a copying or printing job in  
progress. When that job is complete, try your  
job again.  
Faxes are not  
received  
automatically.  
The receiving mode should be set to Fax.  
Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
Check to see if the display shows any error  
message. If it does, clear the problem.  
“Device can't be  
set to the H/W  
mode you want.”  
“Port is being used  
by another  
The Selected port is currently being used.  
Restart your computer and try again.  
The printer cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
The scanner driver is not installed or the  
operating environment is not set up properly.  
Ensure that the machine is properly  
connected and the power is on, Then restart  
your computer.  
The machine does  
not send.  
Make sure that the original is loaded in the  
DADF (or ADF) or on the scanner glass.  
Sending should show up on the display.  
Check the fax machine you are sending to,  
to see if it can receive your fax.  
program.”  
“Port is Disabled.  
“Scanner is busy  
receiving or  
printing data.  
When the current  
job is completed,  
try again.”  
“Invalid handle.”  
“Scanning has  
failed.”  
The USB cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
The incoming fax has  
blank spaces or is of  
poor-quality.  
The fax machine sending you the fax may  
be faulty.  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
Check your machine by making a copy.  
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace  
the toner cartridge, referring to page 66.  
Some of the words  
on an incoming fax  
are stretched.  
The fax machine sending you the fax had a  
temporary document jam.  
There are lines on  
the originals you  
send.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.  
See page 65.  
Troubleshooting_ 87  
         
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
PROBLEM  
SOLUTION  
The machine dials a  
number, but a  
connection with the  
other fax machine  
fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out  
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.  
Speak with the other machine operator and  
ask her/him to sort out the problem.  
When printing a  
document in  
Macintosh with  
Acrobat  
Reader 6.0 or  
higher, colors  
print incorrectly.  
The resolution  
setting in the  
printer driver may  
not be matched  
with the one in  
Acrobat Reader.  
Make sure that the resolution  
setting in your printer driver  
matches the one in Acrobat  
Reader.  
Faxes do not store in There may not be enough memory space to  
memory.  
store the fax. If the display shows the Memory  
Full message, delete from memory any faxes  
you no longer need and then try again to store  
the fax.  
Common Windows problems  
Blank areas appear  
at the bottom of each  
page or on other  
pages, with a small  
strip of text at the  
top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper  
settings in the user option setting. For details  
about paper settings, see page 33.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
“File in Use”  
message appears  
during installation.  
Exit all software applications. Remove all  
software from the StartUp Group, then restart  
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
“General Protection  
Fault”, “Exception  
OE”, “Spool32”, or  
“Illegal Operation”  
messages appear.  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows  
and try printing again.  
Common PostScript problems  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when  
several printer languages are being used.  
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript  
errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired  
selection next to the PostScript errors section  
“Fail To Print”, “A  
printer timeout error  
occurred.messages  
appear.  
These messages may appear during printing.  
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes  
printing. If the message appears in ready mode  
or after printing has been completed, check the  
connection and/or whether an error has  
occurred.  
POSSIBLE  
PROBLEM  
SOLUTION  
CAUSE  
Refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your  
computer for further information on Windows error messages.  
PostScript file  
cannot be  
printed.  
The PostScript  
driver may not be  
installed correctly.  
Install the PostScript  
driver, referring to  
Software section.  
Print a configuration page  
and verify that the PS  
version is available for  
printing.  
If the problem persists,  
contact a service  
representative.  
“Limit Check  
Error” message  
appears.  
The print job was  
too complex.  
You might need to reduce the  
complexity of the page or  
install more memory.  
A PostScript  
error page prints.  
The print job may  
not be PostScript.  
Make sure that the print job is  
a PostScript job. Check to  
see whether the software  
application expected a setup  
or PostScript header file to be  
sent to the machine.  
The optional tray The printer driver  
Open the PostScript driver  
properties, select the Device  
Settings tab, and set the Tray  
option of the Installable  
has not been  
configured to  
recognize the  
optional tray.  
is not selected in  
the driver.  
Options section to Installed  
.
88 _Troubleshooting  
   
Common Linux problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Some color images  
come out in  
unexpected color.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed RGB color  
space and it is converted through CIE color  
space. Because Postscript uses CIE color  
space for Color Matching System, you should  
upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least  
GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can  
find recent Ghostscript versions at  
The machine does  
not print.  
Check if the printer driver is installed in your  
system. Open Unified Driver configurator  
and switch to the Printers tab in Printers  
configuration window to look at the list of  
available printers. Make sure that your  
machine is displayed on the list. If not, invoke  
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.  
Check if the printer is started. Open Printers  
configuration and select your machine on the  
printers list. Look at the description in the  
Selected printer pane. If its status contains  
“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.  
After that normal operation of the printer  
should be restored. The “stopped” status  
might be activated when some problems in  
printing occurred. For instance, this could be  
an attempt to print document when port is  
claimed by a scanning application.  
www.ghostscript.com.  
The machine does  
not print whole pages  
and its output is half  
page printed.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color  
printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of  
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to  
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug  
688252.  
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.  
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of  
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/  
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this  
problem.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only  
one of them at a time is allowed to gain  
control over the device. The other  
I cannot scan via  
Gimp Front-end.  
Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device  
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you  
should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the  
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in  
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or  
Gimp home page. For the detail information,  
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or  
Gimp Front-end application.  
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. You should open ports  
If you wish to use other kind of scan application,  
refer to the Help for application.  
configuration and select the port assigned to  
your printer. In the Selected port pane you  
can see if the port is occupied by some other  
application. If this is the case, you should  
wait for completion of the current job or  
should press Release port button, if you are  
sure that the present owner is not functioning  
properly.  
Check if your application has special print  
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified  
in the command line parameter then remove  
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select  
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command  
line parameter in the command item.  
I encounter error  
“Cannot open port  
device file” when  
printing a document.  
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR  
GUI, for example) while a print job is in  
progress. Known versions of CUPS server  
break the print job whenever print options are  
changed and then try to restart the job from the  
beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port  
while printing, the abrupt termination of the  
driver keeps the port locked and therefore  
unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this  
situation occurred, try to release the port.  
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)  
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2  
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp  
(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the  
socket printing instead of ipp or install later  
version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).  
Some color images  
come out all black.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed color space  
and it is converted through CIE color space.  
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for  
Color Matching System, you should upgrade  
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find  
recent Ghostscript versions at  
www.ghostscript.com.  
Troubleshooting_ 89  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The machine does  
not appear on the  
scanners list.  
Check if your machine is attached to your  
computer. Make sure that it is connected  
properly via the USB port and is turned on.  
Check if the scanner driver for your machine  
is installed in your system. Open Unified  
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners  
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure  
that driver with a name corresponding to  
your machine's name is listed in the window.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only  
one of them at a time is allowed to gain  
control over the device. The other  
The machine does  
not scan.  
Check if a document is loaded into the  
machine.  
Check if your machine is connected to the  
computer. Make sure if it is connected properly  
if I/O error is reported while scanning.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them at a time is allowed to gain control over  
the device. The other “consumer” will  
encounter “device busy” response. This can  
usually happen while starting scan procedure,  
and appropriate message box will be displayed.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/  
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In  
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If this is  
the case, you should wait for completion of the  
current job or should press Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present port’s  
owner is not functioning properly.  
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. This can usually happen while  
starting scan procedure, and appropriate  
message box appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/  
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In  
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If this is  
the case, you should wait for completion of  
the current job or should press Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present port's  
owner is not functioning properly.  
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further  
information on Linux error messages.  
Common Macintosh problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The printer does not  
print PDF file correctly.  
Some parts of graphics,  
text, or illustrations are  
missing.  
Incompatibility between the PDF file and  
the Acrobat products:  
Printing the PDF file as an image may  
solve this problem. Turn on Print As  
Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when  
you print a PDF file as an image.  
The document has  
printed, but the print job  
has not disappeared  
from the spooler in Mac  
OS 10.3.2.  
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or  
higher.  
Some letters are not  
displayed normally  
during the Cover page  
printing.  
This problem is caused because Mac OS  
cannot create the font during the Cover  
page printing. English alphabet and  
numbers are displayed normally at the  
Cover page.  
Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for  
further information on Mac OS error messages.  
90 _Troubleshooting  
 
ordering supplies and accessories  
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
ACCESSORIES  
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s  
performance and capacity.  
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your  
sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your  
country.  
ACCESSORY  
DESCRIPTION  
PART NUMBER  
SUPPLIES  
Memory module  
Extends your  
machine’s memory  
capacity.  
CLX-6200 Series  
When the toner runs out, you can order the following type of toner cartridge  
for your machine:  
CLP-MEM201: 128 MB  
CLP-MEM202: 256 MB  
CLX-6240 Series  
CLP-MEM101: 128 MB  
CLP-MEM102: 256 MB  
CLP-MEM103: 512 MB  
AVERAGE YIELDA  
Average continuous black CLP-K660B (Black)  
cartridge yield: 5,500  
standard pages (Black)  
Average continuous  
TYPE  
PART NUMBER  
High yield  
toner cartridge  
CLP-C660B(Cyan)  
CLP-M660B (Magenta)  
CLP-Y660B (Yellow)  
Optional tray 2  
If you are  
experiencing  
CLX-S6240A  
colored cartridge yield:  
5,000 standard pages  
(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)  
frequent paper  
supply problems,  
you can attach an  
additional 500 sheet  
tray. You can print  
documents in  
Standard yield  
toner cartridge  
Average continuous black CLP-K660A (Black)  
cartridge yield: 2,500  
standard pages (Black)  
Average continuous  
CLP-C660A (Cyan)  
CLP-M660A (Magenta)  
CLP-Y660A (Yellow)  
various sizes and  
types of print  
materials.  
colored cartridge yield:  
2,000 standard pages  
(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)  
IEEE 802.11b/g  
Allows you to  
connect your  
machine to a  
wireless network and  
share it with other  
people over the  
network.  
ML-NWA10L  
CLX-HDK410  
Wireless LAN carda  
CLX-6200ND, CLX-  
6210FX, CLX-  
Paper transfer  
belt  
Approx. 50,000  
CLP-T660B  
When the transfer belt has  
worn out with abrasion, you  
need to change it. By this  
time you may be notified with  
the transfer belt-related  
message on the display.  
6240FX only  
Hard Disk  
Allows you to  
enhance the  
machine’s capability  
and print in various  
ways.  
a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.  
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must  
be purchased in the same country where the machine was  
purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be  
incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges  
and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.  
a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN cards may not be available.  
Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought  
your printer.  
Your machine may have two memory slots with a factory pre-installed  
memory module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory  
capacity, you can add a memory module to the vacant memory slot,  
according to the table above. It is strongly recommended that you  
expand a memory module in vacant memory slot only, without  
removing a pre-installed memory module. If your machine has 128 MB  
memory capacity and you want to add 512 MB, the memory capacity  
expands up to 640 MB.  
Ordering supplies and accessories_ 91  
                 
HOW TO PURCHASE  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local  
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit  
www.samsung.com.supplies and select your country/region to obtain  
information on calling for technical support.  
92 _Ordering supplies and accessories  
 
installing accessories  
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user  
may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.  
This chapter includes:  
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.  
PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING  
ACCESSORIES  
Disconnect the power cord  
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.  
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the  
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external  
accessories.  
Discharge static electricity  
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or  
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or  
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your  
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any  
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before  
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static  
electricity again.  
3. Release the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to  
When installing accessories, battery inside the machine is a service  
component. Do not change it by yourself.  
the right.  
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose  
used batteries according to the instructions.  
UPGRADING A MEMORY MODULE  
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory  
module slot to install additional memory.  
The machine has two memory slots with a factory pre-installed memory  
module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory capacity, you can  
add a memory module to the vacant memory slot. It is strongly  
recommended that you expand a memory module in vacant memory slot  
only without removing a pre-installed memory module. If your machine has  
128 MB memory capacity and you want to add 512 MB, the memory  
capacity expands up to 640 MB. Order information is provided for optional  
memory module. (See page 91)  
1 Control board  
cover  
If you want to remove an existing memory module, push the two  
latches at the ends of the module outward.  
4. Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag.  
Installing a memory module  
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
Installing accessories_ 93  
         
5. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on  
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the  
module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.  
1. Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your  
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see Software  
secion.  
2. Click the Windows Start menu.  
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
4. Select the Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240  
Series PS printer.  
5. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties.  
6. For Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista, select Device Settings.  
7. Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the  
Installable Options section.  
8. Click OK.  
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those  
on an actual memory module and its slot.  
6. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a 'click'.  
USING A WIRELESS NETWORK INTERFACE CARD  
The CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX and CLX-6240FX is equipped with a  
network interface which allows you to use your machine on a network. You  
can also purchase a wireless network interface card to enable the use of the  
printer in wireless network environments  
For order information, see page 91  
Review the precautions on page 93 and then follow this procedure to install  
the wireless network interface card in your machine.  
Installing a wireless network interface card  
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.  
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be  
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,  
carefully try the previous procedure again.  
7. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.  
3. Release the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to  
the right.  
8. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.  
9. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.  
To release the memory module, pull the two tabs on the sides of  
the slot outwards, then the module springs out.  
Activating the added memory in the PS printer  
properties  
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer  
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.  
1 Control board  
cover  
94 _Installing accessories  
         
4. Align the connector on the wireless network interface card with the  
connector on the control board. Push the card firmly into the connector  
on the control board until it is completely and securely in place.  
5. If you selected Search List, press the left/right arrow to select a network  
and press OK.  
If you selected Custom, set each network options:  
Edit SSID: Enter the SSID, the name that identifies a wireless  
network. SSID is case-sensitive so you need to enter it.  
Operation Mode: Select the type of wireless connections.  
In Ad-Hoc mode, wireless cards communicate directly each other.  
In Infrastructure mode, network cards communicate with each other  
through an access point, which allows both wireless and cabled  
cards to send files to the printer.  
In Ad-Hoc mode, even if the network cable is connected, your  
printer will use the wireless interface.  
Channel: This option is available only in the Ad-Hoc mode. In most  
cases, you will not need to change this setting. The printer will scan  
all available channels for the specified network and will adapt its  
channel to the one detected.  
1 Connector  
2 Wireless network  
interface card  
6. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
5. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.  
Selecting the authentication type  
Authentication is a process of identifying the legitimacy of an user to access  
a network. You can select whether or not authentication is used.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until WLAN Security appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Static WEP appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Authentication appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the type you want.  
Open System: Authentication is not used.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used.  
6. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.  
7. Press OK to save your selection.  
7. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.  
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
For information about configuring and using the printer on a wireless  
network environment, refer to the user’s guide provided with the  
wireless network interface card. You can also configure the network  
parameters on the control panel; see the next column.  
Setting Encryption  
If your network uses WEP encryption keys, you can must select the  
appropriate encryption type and configure encryption keys. You can  
configure up to four keys. The active key must match the key value and key  
position (for example, Key 1) configured on other wireless devices in the  
network.  
Configuring basic network settings  
After installing the wireless network card, you must configure the  
appropriate network parameters to use your printer in a wireless network.  
To do this, you can use both control panel and SyncThru Web Service, an  
embedded web site of your printer. This section gives you basic information  
on 802.11b/g network parameters which can be configured from the control  
panel.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until WLAN Security appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Static WEP appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Encryption appears and press OK.  
You can configure basic wireless settings, such as SSID, Operation Mode,  
and channels. You can retrieve basic settings by selecting a wireless  
network or manually configure them as you need.  
If you have set the authentication type to Open System, the  
Encryption menu does not display.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.  
3. Press OK when WLAN Basic appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the setup method you want and press  
6. Set each encryption option and press OK.  
Encrypt. Type: Select an encryption type: None, 64-bit WEP, or  
128-bit WEP.  
Key Type: Select the key type of your network.  
Using Key: Select the key to be used in your network.  
Edit Key: Enter the key number for the selected key position.  
OK.  
Search List: The wireless network interface card on your printer  
searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results.  
Custom: You can configure the wireless settings according to your  
needs.  
Installing accessories_ 95  
     
The numbers you can enter as follows:  
3. Open the control board cover. Release the screws, then lift up the cover  
slightly and pull the cover to the right.  
HEXADECIMAL  
ALPHANUMERIC  
5 characters  
64-bit WEP  
10 digits  
26 digits  
128-bit WEP  
13 characters  
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Restoring default values for wireless networking  
If the problem occurrs when you use or set up the wireless network values,  
take following stops to restore factory default values. Generally, factory  
values of wireless networking are optimized for your printer.  
1 control board  
cover  
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.  
4. Align the connector on the hard disk with the connector on the control  
board. Push the hard disk in until it is latched into place  
.
3. Press the left/right arrow until WLAN Default appears and press OK.  
4. When Restore appears on the bottom line of the display, press OK.  
The machine starts restoring the default values.  
USING THE HARD DISK  
Installing the hard disk allows the data from your computer to be sent to the  
print queue of the printer hard disk. This decreases the workload of the  
computer. You can also use various print features, such as storing a job in  
the hard disk, proofing a job, and printing private documents.  
Installing the hard disk  
For order information, see "Accessories" on page 91. Review the  
precautions on page 93.  
5. Fasten the screws supplied with your new hard disk.  
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.  
6. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.  
7. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.  
96 _Installing accessories  
       
8. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.  
9. Print a configuration page from the control panel to check if the hard disk  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
is correctly installed. See page 62.  
Setting the hard disk in the printer properties  
After installing the hard disk, you need to select it in the printer properties to  
enable its use. Take the following steps:  
6. When Print appears, press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the number of copies you want  
appears and press OK.  
8. Press OK. Printing starts.  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
3. Select the Samsung CLX-6200 Series or CLX-6240 Series printer icon  
or Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240 Series PS  
printer icon.  
Deleting a stored job  
You can delete jobs currently stored in the hard disk.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
4. Right-click on the printer icon and select Properties.  
Samsung CLX-6200 Series or CLX-6240 Series: Click the Printer  
tab and then check Optional Hard Disk Drive (HDD).  
Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240 Series PS:  
Click the Device Option or Device Settings tab and set the  
Optional Hard Disk Drive (HDD) option to Installedd  
5. Click OK.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
Printing with the optional hard disk  
After installing the optional hard disk, you can use advanced printing  
features, such as storing or spooling a print job to the hard disk, proofing a  
job, and specifying of printing a private job in the printer properties window.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Delete appears and press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
Once you have stored files in the hard disk, you can easily print or delete  
the stored files using the control panel of your printer.  
7. When Yes appears, press OK.  
Controlling the active job queue  
All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the Active Job  
Queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job  
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.  
Storing a job  
You can store jobs in the installed hard disk.  
1. Open the file you want to store.  
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window displays.  
3. Click Properties. If you see Setup, Print or Options, click the  
button instead.  
4. Click the Extra tab and click Job Setting.  
5. Select the print mode you want from the drop-down list.  
Normal: Prints in normal mode.  
To delete a file from the queue:  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
Proof: Prints the first file and after a pause prints the next file.  
Confidentical: Stores the files, securing them with a password.  
Store: Stores the file to the hard disk.  
Spool: Spools the file into the hard disk and prints it from the hard  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
disk queue.  
Delay: Prints the file at a specified time.  
6. Enter the user’s name and file name.  
7. Click OK until the Print window is displayed.  
8. Click OK or Print to start printing.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Cancel appears and press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
Printing a stored job  
7. Press the left/right arrow until Yes appears and press OK.  
You can print jobs currently stored in the hard disk.  
To promote a file from the queue:  
You can select a job waiting in the Active Job Queue and change its  
print order so that it can be printed sooner.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.  
want appear and press OK.  
Installing accessories_ 97  
       
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
File Policy  
want appear and press OK.  
You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed  
with the job through HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same name  
when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until File Policy appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the job setting you want appears and  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Promote appears and press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
press OK.  
To print a file immediately:  
Rename: If the HDD memory already has the same name when you  
enter a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name that  
is automatically programmed.  
Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD as you store new job information.  
You can print a job scheduled to be printed at a specified time  
immediately. In this case, the job currently printing is stopped and the  
selected job will be printed. This function is available when the job is  
scheduled for later printing.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
5. Press OK.  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.  
Deleting residual image data  
ImageOverwrite is a security measure for customers who are concerned  
about unauthorized access and duplication of classified or private  
document.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until ImageOverwrite appears and press  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the job setting you want appears and  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Release appears and press OK.  
This option appears only when you select a Delay print job. See  
press OK.  
Immediate: All residual image data from the machine will be erased  
immediately after each job has been processed.  
On Demand: This option provides an on-demand facility for a  
system administrator to erase all the real image data remained in  
HDD after this option enabled. All existing jobs will be deleted  
regardless of their status and all job submissions will be prohibited  
for the duration of the overwrite.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
Printing using the form files  
You can store up to 10 form files in the hard disk and make them printed  
with your document.  
First, you need to create a form file using the printer driver. See the  
Software section.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to move to On or Off for Immediate.  
Press the left/right arrow to move to Enable or Disable for On  
Demand.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Form Menu appears and press OK.  
If you selected On Demand enabled, the machine confirms if the  
overwrite feature starts now. Press the left/right arrow to select  
Yes or No. If you select Yes, On Demand overwrite starts as soon  
as you select Yes. If you select No, this feature will be enabled.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the form you want appears and press OK  
.
Off: Prints in normal mode.  
Single Form: Prints all page using the first form.  
Double Form: Prints the front page using the first form and the  
5. Press OK.  
back page using the second form.  
4. Press Back (  
) to return to the upper menu level.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Select Form appears and press OK.  
6. Press OK when 1st Form appears.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the form file you want appears and  
press OK.  
If you select Double Form, continue the next step.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until 2nd Form appears and press OK.  
9. Press the left/right arrow until the form file for the second form  
appears and press OK.  
98 _Installing accessories  
   
specifications  
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.  
This chapter include:  
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Less than 49 seconds  
The symbol * optional feature depending on machines.  
Boot-up time  
Less than 65 seconds (for CLX-6240FX only)  
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a lot in  
the HDD  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Operating  
environment  
Temperature: 15 to 32.5 °C (59 to 90.5 °F)  
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH  
Up to 50 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
DADF (or ADF)  
Capacitya  
Display  
16 characters x 2 lines  
DADF (or ADF)  
document size  
DADF Width: 148 to 216 mm/Length: 148 to 356 mm  
ADF Width: 142 to 216 mm/Length: 148 to 356 mm  
Toner  
cartridge life c d  
Black  
Average continuous black cartridge  
yield: 5,500 standard pages  
Tray: 250 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Paper input  
capacity  
(CLX-6200 Series is shipped with 2,500  
pages Starter toner cartridge.)  
Multi-purpose tray: 100 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond)  
Color  
Average continuous colored cartridge  
yield: 5,000 standard pages  
(CLX-6200 Series shipped with 2,000  
pages Starter toner cartridge.)  
Optional tray: 500 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond)  
(Yellow/  
Magenta/  
Cyan)  
For details about paper input capacity, see 34 page.  
Face down: 170 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Paper output  
capacity  
Paper transfer  
belt  
Approx. 50,000 pages (A4, Letter)  
Power rating  
AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V  
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct  
voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your  
machine.  
Memory  
(Expandable)*  
CLX-6200 Series: 128 MB (max. 384 MB)  
CLX-6240 Series: 256 MB (max. 768 MB)  
External  
dimension  
(W x D x H)  
CLX-6200FX  
468 x 498 x 645 mm  
(18.4 x 19.6 x 25.4 inches) without  
optional tray  
Power  
consumption  
CLX-6200 Series  
Average operating mode: Less than  
580 W  
CLX-6200ND, 468 x 498 x 651 mm  
CLX-6210FX,  
CLX-6240FX  
Ready mode: Less than 82 W  
Power save mode: Less than 18 W  
Power off mode: 0 W  
(18.4 x 19.6 x 25.6 inches) without  
optional tray  
Weight  
(Including  
consumables)  
CLX-6200FX: 35 kg (77.16 lbs)  
CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX: 36 kg (79.37 lbs)  
CLX-6240FX: 37 kg (81.57 lbs)  
CLX-6240 Series  
Average operating mode: Less than  
650 W  
Ready mode: Less than 82 W  
Power save mode: Less than 28 W  
Power off mode: 0 W  
Package  
weight  
Paper: 5.8 Kg (12.7 lbs)  
Plastic: 1.8 Kg (3.9 lbs)  
Noise Levelb  
CLX-6200 Series  
CLX-6240 Series  
Ready mode: Less than 32 dBA  
Printing mode: Less than 53 dBA  
Copying mode: Less than 54 dBA  
Fusing  
temperature  
180 °C (356 °F)  
a.DADF (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX), ADF (CLX-6200FX)  
b.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779  
c. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of  
pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media  
type, and media size.  
Ready mode: Less than 32 dBA  
Printing mode: Less than 54 dBA  
Copying mode: Less than 55 dBA  
Default time to 20 Minutes  
power save  
d.It varies depending on the product configuration.  
mode from  
ready mode  
Specifications_ 99  
     
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS  
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Color laser beam printing  
Compatibility  
TWAIN standard/WIA standard  
Color CCD  
Printing method  
Printing speeda  
Scanning method  
CLX-6200 Series: Up to 20 ppm (A4), 21 ppm  
(Letter)  
Resolutiona  
TWAIN  
standard/  
WIA  
Optical: Up to 600 x 1,200 dpi  
Enhanced: Up to 4,800 x 4,800 dpi  
CLX-6240 Series: Up to 24 ppm(A4), 25 ppm  
(Letter)  
standard  
Duplex printing  
speed  
CLX-6200 Series: Up to 7 ipm (A4/Letter)  
CLX-6240 Series: Up to 10 ipm (A4/Letter)  
Scan to  
USB  
100, 200, 300 dpi  
First print out  
time  
CLX-6200 Series  
Scan to  
E-mail  
100, 200, 300 dpi  
From ready: Less than 25 seconds  
From coldboot: Less than 75 seconds  
CLX-6240 Series  
From ready: Less than 19 seconds  
From coldboot: Less than 80 seconds  
Black &  
White  
Scan to  
PC  
75, 150, 200, 300, 600 dpi  
PDF, TIFF, JPEGb, BMP  
Network Scan  
File format  
CLX-6200 Series  
From ready: Less than 25 seconds  
From coldboot: Less than 75 seconds  
CLX-6240 Series  
Effective  
scanning length  
Scanner glass: 289 mm (11.38 inches)  
DADF (or ADF): 348 mm (13.7 inches)  
Color  
From ready: Less than 19 seconds  
From coldboot: Less than 80 seconds  
Effective  
scanning width  
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)  
Color bit depth  
Mono bit depth  
Internal: 36 bit  
External: 24 bit  
Print resolution  
Printer language  
Max. 2,400 x 600 dpi effective output  
CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX :  
SPL-C, PostScript 3, PCL6  
1 bit for black & white mode  
8 bit for gray scale  
CLX-6240FX: PostScript 3, PCL6  
a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might  
differ.  
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.  
OS compatibilityb  
Interface  
Windows: 2000/XP/2003/Vista/2008  
Linux: RedHat 8.0~9.0, Mandrake 9.2~10.1,  
SuSE 8.2~9.2, Fedra Core 1~4  
Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.3~10.5, Universal Mac  
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS  
High speed USB 2.0  
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (embedded type)  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance,  
application software, connecting method, media type, media size and  
job complexity.  
Copy Speeda  
CLX-6200 Series: Up to 20 cpm (A4), 21 cpm  
b.Visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software version.  
(Letter)  
CLX-6240 Series: Up to 24 cpm(A4), 25 cpm  
(Letter)  
Copy  
resolution  
Text  
DADF (or ADF): Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Scanner glass: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Text/  
photo  
Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Magazine Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Photo  
DADF (or ADF): Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Scanner glass: Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi  
Zoom range  
DADF (or ADF): 25% to 100%  
Scanner glass: 25% to 400%  
a.Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy.  
100 _Specifications  
       
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS  
The fax feature may not be supported depending on machines.  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
ITU-T G3  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or  
behind PABX  
Data coding  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG  
33.6 Kbps  
Modem speed  
Up to 3 seconds/pagea  
Transmission  
speed  
Maximum  
356 mm  
document length  
Resolution  
Color  
Black  
200 x 200 dpi  
Standard: Up to 203 x 98 dpi  
Fine: Up to 203 x 196 dpi  
Super Fine: Up to 300 x 300 dpi  
(Receiving only)  
Memory  
Halftone  
CLX-6200FX/ CLX-6210FX: 4 MB (Approx. 200  
pages)  
CLX-6240FX: 500 Jobs (Tx: 100, Rx: 400)  
256 levels  
a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase ”C”  
by ITU-T No. 1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.  
Specifications_ 101  
 
glossary  
DADF  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well  
as mentioned in this user's guide.  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the  
machine can scan on both sides of the paper.  
ADF  
Default  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can  
scan some amount of the paper at once.  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box  
state, reset, or initialized.  
DHCP  
AppleTalk  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server  
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters  
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information  
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also  
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for  
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)  
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
BIT Depth  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to  
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color  
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits  
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for  
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and  
white.  
DIMM  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds  
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,  
received fax data.  
DNS  
BMP  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information  
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,  
such as the Internet.  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file  
format on that platform.  
Dot Matrix Printer  
BOOTP  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head  
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an  
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to  
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap  
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The  
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each  
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP  
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.  
DPI  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for  
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher  
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.  
CCD  
DRPD  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan  
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to  
prevent any damage when you move the machine.  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers.  
Collation  
Duplex  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When  
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing  
additional copies.  
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the  
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer  
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.  
Control Panel  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or  
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of  
the machine.  
Duty Cycle  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer  
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation  
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of  
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty  
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer  
limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Coverage  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.  
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%  
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or  
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a  
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.  
ECM  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into  
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and  
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes  
caused by telephone line noise.  
CSV  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to  
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is  
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the  
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.  
Emulation  
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as  
another.  
102 _Glossary  
 
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different  
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.  
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is  
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the  
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.  
Intranet  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and  
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of  
an organization's information or operations with its employees.  
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal  
website.  
Ethernet  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local  
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical  
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control  
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized  
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in  
use during the 1990s to the present.  
IP address  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in  
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing  
the Internet Protocol standard.  
IPM  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a  
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer  
can complete within one minute.  
EtherTalk  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer  
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now  
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
IPP  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for  
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so  
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of  
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and  
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution  
than older ones.  
FDI  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to  
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card  
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.  
FTP  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for  
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol  
(such as the Internet or an intranet).  
IPX/SPX  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet  
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare  
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services  
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and  
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for  
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this  
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
Fuser Unit  
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It  
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred  
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that  
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm  
when it comes out of a laser printer.  
ISO  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an  
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from  
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and  
commercial standards.  
Gateway  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer  
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a  
network that allows access to another computer or network.  
ITU-T  
Grayscale  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international  
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio  
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,  
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection  
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone  
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image  
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented  
by various shades of gray.  
Halftone  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.  
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter  
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
HDD  
JBIG  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard  
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data  
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression  
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for  
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be  
used on other images.  
IEEE  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an  
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement  
of technology related to electricity.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used  
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the  
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide  
Web.  
IEEE 1284  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to  
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to  
the peripheral (for example, a printer).  
LDAP  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking  
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/  
IP.  
Glossary_ 103  
LED  
PABX  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates  
the status of a machine.  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone  
switching system within a private enterprise.  
MAC address  
PCL  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated  
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually  
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-  
34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface  
Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to  
locate machines on large networks.  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language  
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an  
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has  
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page  
printers.  
PDF  
MFP  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed  
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a  
device independent and resolution independent format.  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the  
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a  
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.  
PostScript  
MH  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming  
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -  
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the  
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines  
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-  
based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress  
white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this  
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.  
Printer Driver  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer  
to the printer.  
MMR  
Print Media  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method  
recommended by ITU-T T.6.  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can  
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
Modem  
PPM  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,  
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted  
information.  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining  
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can  
produce in one minute.  
MR  
PRN file  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T  
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is  
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the  
differences are encoded and transmitted.  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the  
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies  
many tasks.  
Protocol  
NetWare  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the  
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.  
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
PS  
See PostScript.  
OPC  
PSTN  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual  
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is  
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.  
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the  
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches  
from grits of a paper.  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the  
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial  
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.  
Resolution  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The  
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.  
Originals  
SMB  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,  
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but  
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to  
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications  
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-  
process communication mechanism.  
OSI  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the  
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.  
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides  
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,  
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,  
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.  
SMTP  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail  
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-  
based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are  
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server  
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.  
104 _Glossary  
Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to  
determine which part of the address is the network address and which  
part is the host address.  
TCP/IP  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);  
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack  
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.  
TCR  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each  
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of  
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after  
failed transmissions.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped  
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from  
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the  
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and  
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been  
made by various image processing applications.  
Toner Cartridge  
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner  
is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text  
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the  
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.  
TWAIN  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-  
compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be  
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft  
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.  
UNC Path  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network  
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a  
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>  
URL  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents  
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates  
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the  
domain name where the resource is located.  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the  
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.  
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a  
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.  
Watermark  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears  
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first  
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by  
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,  
currency, and other government documents to discourage  
counterfeiting.  
WIA  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is  
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be  
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant  
scanner.  
Glossary_ 105  
index  
demo page, print 25  
jam, clear  
A
display language, change 28  
accessories  
installing  
job timeout, set 30  
driver  
hard disk 96  
wireless network interface card  
installation 27  
K
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection)  
key sound 29  
Address Book  
group dial numbers 58  
speed buttons 57  
speed dial numbers 57  
E
L
edge erase, special copy 42  
LED  
Address Book, use 48  
ADF 19  
Linux problems 88  
loading originals  
F
ADF rubber pad, replace 69  
ADF, load 32  
fax header, set 51  
Fax mode, receiving mode 53  
fax number, set 51  
faxing  
scanner glass 32  
adjustment  
M
alarm sound 29  
default settings, change 57  
delayed faxes 54  
fax setup 56  
Multiple Send faxes 54  
priority faxes 55  
machine ID, set 51  
Ans/Fax mode, receiving mode 53  
Maintenance  
maintenance parts 69  
toner cartridge 65  
C
characters, enter 29  
margin shift, special copy 41  
memory module  
sending faxes 52  
cleaning  
Forwarding 55  
installing 93  
ordering 91  
outside 63  
scan unit 65  
memory, clear 63  
G
clock mode 29  
collation, special copy 40  
control panel 20  
copying  
Multiple Sned faxes 54  
Group dial numbers, set 58  
N
network  
H
hard disk  
installing 96  
use 97  
2-up, 4-up 40  
setting up 25  
network interface card, install 94  
I
O
default setting, change 40  
ID card copy 40  
margin shift 41  
original type 39  
ID card, special copy 40  
ID copy 20, 21  
installing accessories  
optional tray 69, 91  
originals  
jam, clear 71  
hard disk 96  
network interface card 94  
time out, set 42  
D
J
jam  
date and time, set 29  
default mode, change 29  
delayed fax 54  
clearing paper from the tray1 73  
tips for avoiding paper jams 71  
106_Index  
 
P
S
W
paper  
scan power save mode 30  
Windows problems 87  
changing the size 36  
clearing jam 73  
loading in the multi-purpose tray 37  
loading in the optional tray 36  
loading in the tray1 36  
scanner glass  
cleaning 65  
wireless network interface card, install 94  
loading documents 32  
scanning  
default setting, change 47  
to email 46  
to FTP server 47  
USB flash memory 59  
paper tray, set  
paper type  
secure receiving mode 53  
PostScript  
sending a fax  
automatically 52  
power save mode 30  
setting  
print quality problems, solve 83  
printing  
sounds, set 29  
demo page 25  
speaker sound 29  
USB memory 60  
speaker volume 29  
special copy features 40  
speed buttons, set 57  
speed dial numbers, set 57  
priority fax 55  
problem, solve  
faxing 86  
supplies  
paper feeding 81  
printing quality 83  
Windows 87  
expected toner cartridge life 65  
T
Tel mode, receiving mode 53  
R
toner cartridge  
replacing 67  
receiving a fax  
in Ans/Fax mode 53  
in DRPD mode 53  
in Fax mode 53  
in Secure Receiving mode 53  
tray  
adjusting the width and length 36  
U
receiving modes 52  
USB flash memory  
data backup 60  
managing 61  
printing 60  
redialing  
automatically 52  
scanning 59  
replacing  
using  
ADF rubber pad 69  
SetIP 26  
replacing components  
toner cartridge 66  
V
replacing, toner cartridge 67  
reports, print 62  
volume, adjust  
ringer 29  
Index_107  
contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.  
COUNTRY/  
REGION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
COUNTRY/  
REGION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
WEB SITE  
WEB SITE  
HONDURAS  
800-7919267  
www.samsung.com/  
ARGENTINE  
AUSTRALIA  
AUSTRIA  
0800-333-3733  
1300 362 603  
HONG KONG  
HUNGARY  
3698-4698  
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, www.samsung.com/at  
€ 0.07/min)  
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
BELGIUM  
02 201 2418  
www.samsung.com/be  
www.samsung.com/  
INDIA  
3030 8282  
1800 110011  
1800 3000 8282  
INDONESIA  
ITALIA  
0800-112-8888  
BRAZIL  
0800-124-421  
4004-0000  
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)  
1-800-234-7267  
CANADA  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
JAMAICA  
www.samsung.com/  
CHILE  
CHINA  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
JAPAN  
0120-327-527  
8000-7267  
800-810-5858  
400-810-5858  
010-6475 1880  
LATVIA  
LITHUANIA  
LUXEMBURG  
MALAYSIA  
MEXICO  
8-800-77777  
02 261 03 710  
1800-88-9999  
COLOMBIA  
01-8000112112  
0-800-507-7267  
COSTA RICA  
www.samsung.com/  
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
CZECH  
800-SAMSUNG (800-  
REPUBLIC  
726786)  
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-  
7267864) (€ 0,10/min)  
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis  
Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8  
NEW ZEALAND  
NICARAGUA  
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 www.samsung.com/nz  
786)  
DENMARK  
ECUADOR  
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
1-800-10-7267  
00-1800-5077267  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/  
NORWAY  
PANAMA  
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
800-7267  
EL SALVADOR  
800-6225  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/  
ESTONIA  
800-7267  
PHILIPPINES  
1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
KAZAKHSTAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
www.samsung.com/  
KYRGYZSTAN  
FINLAND  
00-800-500-55-500  
30-6227 515  
02-5805777  
POLAND  
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678) www.samsung.com/pl  
022-607-93-33  
FRANCE  
3260 dites ‘SAMSUNG’ (€  
0,15/min)  
0 825 08 65 65 (€ 0,15/min)  
PORTUGAL  
PUERTO RICO  
80820-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
GERMANY  
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-  
7864 € 0,14/min)  
1-800-682-3180  
www.samsung.com/  
GUATEMALA  
1-800-299-0013  
www.samsung.com/  
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676  
www.samsung.com/  
108 _Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
COUNTRY/  
REGION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
WEB SITE  
EIRE  
0818 717 100  
RUSSIA  
8-800-555-55-55  
SINGAPORE  
1800-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
SLOVAKIA  
0800-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
SPAIN  
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172  
678)  
SWEDEN  
075-SAMSUNG (726 78 64) www.samsung.com/se  
SWITZERLAND  
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, www.samsung.com/ch  
CHF 0.08/min)  
TADJIKISTAN  
TAIWAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0800-329-999  
THAILAND  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
www.samsung.com/  
TURKEY  
U.A.E  
444 77 11  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
8000-4726  
U.K  
0845 SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
U.S.A  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
(7267864)  
UKRAINE  
8-800-502-0000  
UZBEKISTAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
www.samsung.com/  
VENEZUELA  
VIETNAM  
0-800-100-5303  
1 800 588 889  
www.samsung.com/  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 109  
© 2008 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.  
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.  
Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.  
UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.  
TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.  
Rev. 3.00  
Samsung Printer  
Software section  
SOFTWARE SECTION  
CONTENTS  
Chapter 1: INSTALLING PRINTER SOFTWARE IN WINDOWS  
Chapter 2: BASIC PRINTING  
Chapter 3: ADVANCED PRINTING  
1
Chapter 4: USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER  
Chapter 5: USING DIRECT PRINTING UTILITY  
Chapter 6: SHARING THE PRINTER LOCALLY  
2
Chapter 7: SCANNING  
Chapter 8: USING SMART PANEL  
Chapter 9: USING YOUR PRINTER IN LINUX  
3
Chapter 10: USING YOUR PRINTER WITH A MACINTOSH  
4
Typical Installation  
1
Installing Printer  
Software in Windows  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
This chapter includes:  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs  
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
.
NOTE: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for  
other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows  
user's guide or online help.  
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
3
Click Next.  
Installing Printer Software  
You can install the printer software for local printing or network  
printing. To install the printer software on the computer,  
perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on  
the printer in use.  
A printer driver is software that lets your computer  
communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers  
may differ depending on the operating system you are using.  
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning  
installation.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Installing Software for Local Printing  
4
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click  
Next  
.
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer  
using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a  
USB or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network,  
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
NOTE: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during  
the installation procedure, click  
in the upper right corner of  
the box to close the window, or click Cancel  
.
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
         
Custom Installation  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
You can choose individual components to install.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs  
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
3
Click Next.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.  
6
7
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to  
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and  
click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
4
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
5
Select your printer and click Next  
.
6
Select the components to be installed and click Next.  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by  
clicking [Browse].  
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.  
8
9
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to  
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and  
click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.  
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click  
Next  
Installing Software for Network  
Printing  
.
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first  
configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have  
assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to  
install the software on each computer on the network.  
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
Typical Installation  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
NOTE: If your printer is not connected to the network, the  
following window will appear. Select a setup option you want,  
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
click Next  
.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs  
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
3
Click Next.  
Then the Set IP Address window appears. Do as follows:  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
1.Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the  
list.  
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
2.Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the  
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  
address for the network printer.  
Otherwise, just click Finish.  
3.Click Next, and go to step 6.  
You can also set the network printer via SyncThruTM Web  
Service, an embedded web server. Click Launch SWS on  
Set IP Address window. Your machine’s embedded  
website opens.  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install and set a  
specific IP address.  
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs  
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page in machine.  
.
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please  
turn off the firewall and click Update  
For Windows operating system, click Start  
.
Control Panel  
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.  
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
3
Click Next  
.
printer.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page in machine.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn  
off the firewall and click Update  
.
For Windows operating system, click Start  
Control Panel  
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.  
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific  
network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP  
Address window appears. Do as follows:  
4
.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the  
list.  
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the  
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  
address for the network printer.  
click Next  
.
c. Click Next  
.
You can also set the network printer via SyncThruTM Web  
Service, an embedded web server. Click Launch SWS on  
Set IP Address window. Your machine’s embedded website  
opens.  
6
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the  
components, the following window appears. You can also  
change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
10  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
the network, set the printer as the default printer, and  
change the port name of each printer. Click Next  
.
Reinstalling Printer Software  
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
4
Select Repair and click Next  
.
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up  
this printer on a server checkbox.  
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any  
item individually.  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
11  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
   
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
Installing mono printer driver  
This printer features a monochrome only printer. This mono  
driver limits output to th black toner. You must install the mono  
driver on your computer. Following steps guide you through the  
step by step installation process.  
1
2
3
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on. Or your computer and printer are  
connected to the network.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The  
CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click  
Next  
.
If you installed the printer software for local printing  
and you select your printer driver name, the window  
asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:  
Click Cancel.  
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click  
Next  
.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.  
6
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish  
.
Removing Printer Software  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
Select Remove and click Next  
.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any  
item individually.  
Select the components you want to remove and then click  
If the confirmation window appears, click Finish.  
4
5
6
7
Click Start  
Select Add Printer  
When Add Printer Wizard appears, click Next  
Printers and Faxes.  
4
5
.
Next  
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes  
.
.
Select Local printer attached to this computer, and  
Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play  
printer, then click Next. Go to step 13.  
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
If your computer does not find the printer, then follow the  
next step.  
After the software is removed, click Finish  
.
8
9
Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window.  
In the Select a Printer Port window, select Have  
Disk...  
.
10Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer.  
ex) Windows XP 32 bit  
Select CD-ROM drive  
WINXP_2000_VISTA-32  
11Select ***.inf file and click Open.  
12Click OK in the Install From Disk window.  
Printer  
PC_MONO  
12  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
     
13Select a mono driver in the Printers field, and click Next.  
NOTE: If you have installed a mono driver before, then the  
Use Existing Driver window. Select as the window explains,  
and click Next. Also, depending on your computer  
configuration, the printer sharing window or the print the test  
page window may appear; make the appropriate selection.  
14Enter your printer name, and click Next.  
15Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver.  
16NOTE: If your printer is connected to a network, go to  
printer's Properties and select the Ports tab, then click  
Add Portand Standard TCP/IP Port, and create a new  
port to connect to the printer. To create a new port, follow  
the procedure laid out in the wizard window.  
13  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
The basic print settings are selected within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
print range.  
2
Basic Printing  
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing  
tasks in Windows.  
This chapter includes:  
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
3
4
Select your printer driver from the Name drop-down  
list.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer  
If you see Setup Printer, or Options in your Print  
,
window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next  
screen.  
Click OK to close the printer properties window.  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print  
window.  
Printing a Document  
NOTES  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
Printing to a file (PRN)  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your  
purpose.  
To create a file:  
1
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see  
an exclamation  
mark or  
mark. An exclamation mark  
means you can select that certain option but it is not  
recommended, and  
mark means you cannot select that  
option due to the machine’s setting or environment.  
The following procedure describes the general steps required  
for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps  
for printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your  
software application for the exact printing procedure.  
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is  
displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your  
application.  
2
Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then  
click OK.  
14  
Basic Printing  
         
Layout Tab  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes  
Printer Settings  
Multiple Pages per Side  
Printing. See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more  
information on accessing printer properties.  
,
Poster Printing and Booklet  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your  
Windows User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see “Printer Tab”  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in  
the software application first, and change any remaining  
settings using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
Paper Orientation  
Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which  
information is printed on a page.  
Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet  
style.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes  
.
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.  
Printing Preferences  
.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
Landscape  
Portrait  
Layout Options  
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options.  
You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing  
.
Double-sided Printing  
Double-sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of  
paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
15  
Basic Printing  
         
Cotton Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) cotton paper such  
as Gilbert 25 % and Gilbert 100 %.  
Archive Paper: When you need to keep print-out for a long  
period time such as archives, select this option.  
Plain Paper: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your  
printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m2)  
cotton paper.  
Paper Tab  
Use the following options to set the basic paper handling  
specifications when you access the printer properties. See  
“Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information on  
accessing printer properties.  
Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties.  
Recycled Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) recycled paper.  
Color Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) color-  
backgrounded paper.  
First Page  
This property allows you to print the first page using a different  
paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the  
paper source for the first page.  
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-  
purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in  
the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page  
option. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
Scaling Printing  
Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale  
your print job on a page. You can choose from None  
,
Reduce/  
Enlarge, and Fit to Page  
.
Copies  
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.  
You can select 1 to 999 copies.  
Paper Options  
Size  
Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.  
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Custom  
.
When the Custom Paper Setting window appears, set the paper  
size and click OK. The setting appears in the list so that you can  
select it.  
Source  
Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.  
Use Multi-Purpose Tray when printing on special materials like  
envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a  
time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.  
If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer  
automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:  
Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.  
Type  
Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality  
printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.  
Thin Paper: Less than 19 lb (70 g/m2) thin paper.  
Thick Paper: 24 lb to 32 lb (90~120 g/m2) thick paper.  
Bond Paper When you use the bond paper, select this  
:
option.  
16  
Basic Printing  
       
after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print  
correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your  
print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful  
when printing Adobe. This feature is available only  
when you use the PCL 6 printer driver.  
Graphics Tab  
Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs. See “Printing a Document” on  
page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties.  
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.  
-
-
Download as Bitmap: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download the font data as bitmap images.  
Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or  
Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this  
setting.This feature is available only when you use  
the PCL 6 printer driver.  
Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver  
will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents  
with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,  
printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this  
setting. This feature is available only when you use  
the PCL 6 printer driver.  
Print All Text To Black: When the Print All Text To  
Black option is checked, all text in your document prints solid  
black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.  
Print All Text To Darken: When the Print All Text To  
Darken option is checked, all text in your document is allowed  
to print darker than on a normal document. (CLX-6200ND,  
CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX only).  
Quality  
Grayscale Enhancement: Press the Smart Color tab. It  
allows users to preserve the details of nature photos, and  
improve contrast and readability among gray scaled  
colors, when printing color documents in grayscale.  
The Quality options you can select may vary depending  
on your printer model. The higher the setting, the sharper the  
clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also  
may increase the time it takes to print a document.  
Fine Edge: Press the Smart Color tab. It allows users to  
emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving  
readability and align each color channel registration in color  
printing mode. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX  
only).  
Color Mode  
You can choose color options. Setting to Color typically produces  
the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to  
print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. If you  
want to adjust the color options manually, select Manual and  
click the Color Adjust or Color Matching button.  
Extras Tab  
You can select output options for your document. See “Printing  
a Document” on page 14 for more information about accessing  
the printer properties.  
Copies Setting : In order to use this option, first you need to  
set total number of copies from Paper tab. When you make  
several copies, and if you want to print some copies in color and  
some in grayscale, use this option and select the number of  
copies in grayscale.  
Click the Extras tab to access the following feature:  
Color Adjust : You can adjust the appearance of images by  
changing the settings in the Levels option.  
Color Matching : You can adjust the appearance of images by  
changing the settings in the Settings option.  
Advanced Options  
You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
Options button.  
Raster Compression: This option determines the  
compression level of images for transferring data from a  
computer to a printer. If you set this option to Maximum, the  
printing speed will be high, but the printing quality will be low.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  
printer driver.  
TrueType Options: This option determines what the driver  
tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.  
Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your  
document. This feature is available only when you use  
the PCL 6 printer driver.  
-
Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your  
document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If,  
Watermark  
17  
Basic Printing  
             
You can create a background text image to be printed on each  
page of your document. For details, see “Using Watermarks” on  
Printer Tab  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder,  
you can view the Printer tab. You can set the printer  
configuration.  
Overlay  
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and  
letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 23.  
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
Output Options  
1
2
3
4
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Select Printers and Faxes  
Print Subset: You can set the sequence in which the pages  
.
print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.  
Select your printer driver icon.  
-
-
-
-
Normal (1,2,3): Your printer prints all pages from the first  
page to the last page.  
Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Your printer prints all pages  
from the last page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd  
numbered pages of the document.  
Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Properties  
.
5
Click the Printer tab and set the options.  
Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even  
numbered pages of the document.  
Using a Favorite Setting  
The Favorites option, which is visible on each properties tab,  
allows you to save the current properties settings for future  
use.  
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the  
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident  
fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the  
fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes  
time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.  
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts  
used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,  
however, you use fonts in your document that are very different  
from those resident in the printer, your printed output will  
appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  
printer driver.  
To save a Favorites item:  
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
Save as Form for Overlay: Select Save as Form for Overlay to  
save the document as a form file (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Once  
this option is selected, the printer driver requires the file name  
and the destination path each time you print. If you want to  
preset the file name and specify the path, click on the button in  
the Output to area, and type the file name and specify the path.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  
printer driver.  
3
Click Save.  
When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are  
saved.  
Job Setting  
To use a saved setting, select the item from the Favorites drop  
down list. The printer is now set to print according to the  
Favorites setting you selected.  
Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the  
printing file by using the optional HDD. Some printers do not  
support this feature.  
To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click  
Delete  
.
Using Onscreen Help File  
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting Printer Default from the list.  
• For more information about Job Setting, click  
at the  
top right corner of the window. The Job Setting Help  
window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied  
Using Help  
on the Job Setting  
.
Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking  
the Help button in the printer properties window. These help  
screens give detailed information about the printer features  
provided by the printer driver.  
About Tab  
You can also click  
from the upper right corner of the  
Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the  
version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,  
you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.  
about accessing printer properties.  
window, and then click on any setting.  
18  
Basic Printing  
             
3
Advanced Printing  
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing  
tasks.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One  
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet  
of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will  
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You  
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
NOTE  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side in  
the Layout Type drop-down list.  
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet  
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down  
list.  
This chapter includes:  
4
Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down  
list, if necessary.  
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
5
6
Click OK and print the document.  
19  
Advanced Printing  
         
Printing Posters  
Printing Booklets  
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,  
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
9
9
8
8
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both  
sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can  
be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.  
2
3
Click the Layout tab, select Poster Printing in the  
Layout Type drop-down list.  
Configure the poster option:  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a  
You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>  
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4>. If you select  
,
2
From the Layout tab, choose Booklet Printing from the  
Layout Type drop-down list.  
Poster<2x2>, the output will be automatically stretched  
to cover 4 physical pages.  
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all  
paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for  
this feature, select the paper size in the Size option on the  
Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout  
Type drop-down list on the Layout tab is activated.  
3
Click the Paper tab, and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it  
easier to pasting the sheets together.  
4
5
0.15 inches  
After printing, fold and staple the pages.  
0.15 inches  
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by pasting the sheets together.  
20  
Advanced Printing  
         
Printing on Both Sides of Paper  
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  
Document  
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,  
decide how you want your document oriented.  
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or  
smaller on the printed page.  
The options are:  
Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is  
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control  
panel of the printer. If this option does not appear,  
your printer does not have this feature.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge in the  
Printing Type drop-down list.  
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
None  
Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in  
book binding.  
You can also click the  
or  
button.  
Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.  
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.  
2
Click OK and print the document.  
2
3
2
5
3
3
2
5
5
3
5
Fitting Your Document to a  
Selected Paper Size  
Long Edge  
Short Edge  
Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option  
does not appear, your printer does not have this  
feature.  
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This  
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small  
document.  
A
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,  
envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the  
printer may result.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page in the Printing  
Type drop-down list.  
Select the correct size from the Output size drop-down  
list.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. “Printing a  
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.  
2
3
From the Layout tab, select the paper orientation.  
Click OK and print the document.  
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the  
binding option you want.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should  
complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every  
other page of the document first. After printing the first side of  
your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-  
screen instructions to complete the printing job.  
21  
Advanced Printing  
           
Editing a Watermark  
Using Watermarks  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current  
Watermarks list and change the watermark message and  
options.  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray  
letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally  
across the first page or all pages of a document.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the  
printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Extras tab, and select the desired watermark  
from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the  
selected watermark in the preview image.  
Deleting a Watermark  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
From the Extras tab, click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
Click OK and start printing.  
NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when  
it is printed.  
3
4
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
.
Creating a Watermark  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Extras tab, and click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays  
in the preview window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only.  
4
Select watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale  
level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle  
of the watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.  
When you have finished editing, click OK and start  
printing.  
To stop printing the watermark, select (No Watermark) from  
the Watermark drop-down list.  
22  
Advanced Printing  
                 
Using a Page Overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
Using Overlays  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
What is an Overlay?  
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need  
to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need  
only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your  
document.  
Dear ABC  
3
4
Click the Extras tab.  
Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down  
list box.  
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the  
Overlay list, click Edit button and Load Overlay, and  
select the overlay file.  
Regards  
WORLD BEST  
5
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
the Load Overlay window.  
Creating a New Page Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay  
containing your logo or image.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the  
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the  
overlay from the Overlay List box.  
6
7
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing. If this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on  
your document.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as  
you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.  
To save the document as an overlay, access printer  
Click the Extras tab, and click Edit button in the Overlay  
section.  
WORLD BEST  
2
3
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been  
selected, the overlay automatically prints with your  
document.  
4
5
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.  
Click OK or Yes until printing begins.  
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight  
characters in the File name box. Select the destination  
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).  
The selected overlay downloads with your print job and  
prints on your document.  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List box.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the  
same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
Click OK or Yes to finish creating.  
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your  
computer hard disk drive.  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an  
overlay with a watermark.  
1
2
3
In the printer properties window, click the Extras tab.  
Click the Edit button in the Overlay section.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay  
List box.  
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.  
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes  
.
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
23  
Advanced Printing  
                 
Advanced  
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
button.  
4
Using Windows  
PostScript Driver  
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your  
system CD-ROM to print a document.  
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer  
features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the  
supplied software CD-ROM.  
Printer Settings  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the  
paper loaded in the tray.  
Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs.  
Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript  
options or printer features.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in  
the software application first, and change any remaining  
settings using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
Using Help  
You can click  
then click on any setting.  
from the upper right corner of the window, and  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes.  
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Printing Preferences.  
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
24  
Using Windows PostScript Driver  
           
5
Using Direct Printing  
Utility  
Printing  
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility.  
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF  
files without having to open the files.  
From the Direct Printing Utility window  
1
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility  
CAUTION  
.
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.  
Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry  
printing.  
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on  
your desk top.  
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.  
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section  
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.  
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.  
2
3
and click Browse  
.
• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able  
to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.  
Select the PDF file you will print and click Open  
.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
next column.  
• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer,  
PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct  
Printing Utility program.  
4
5
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version  
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file  
to print it.  
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
Using the shortcut icon  
1
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to  
the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.  
Overview Direct Printing Utility  
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.  
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly  
to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data  
through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer  
driver. It only supports PDF format.  
NOTE  
:
If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,  
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer  
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.  
To installing this program, you should select Custom  
installation and put a check mark in this program when you  
install the printer driver.  
2
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs.  
Click Print  
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
.
Using the right-click menu  
1
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct  
Printing  
.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is  
added.  
2
3
Select the printer you will use.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
below part.  
4
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
25  
Using Direct Printing Utility  
             
6
Sharing the Printer  
Locally  
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,  
which is called “host computer,” on the network.  
Setting Up a Host Computer  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes  
.
Double-click your printer driver icon  
.
From the Printer menu, select Sharing  
.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
Check the Share this printer box.  
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK  
.
NOTE  
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with  
your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of  
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Setting Up a Client Computer  
1
2
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.  
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search  
for Computers  
.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name  
field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires  
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password  
of host computer account.)  
4
5
6
Double-click Printers and Faxes  
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect  
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.  
.
.
26  
Sharing the Printer Locally  
     
7
Scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into  
digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the  
files, display them on your web site or use them to create  
projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software  
or the WIA driver.  
Scanning Using Samsung  
SmarThru Office  
Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for  
your machine. You can use SmarThru Office to scan images  
or documents from local or network scanners.  
This chapter includes:  
Using Samsung SmarThru Office  
Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru Office  
:
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
NOTE  
:
Place your photograph or page on the document glass or  
DADF (or ADF).  
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office, you  
will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.  
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved  
depends upon various factors, including computer  
speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the  
image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning,  
you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,  
especially using enhanced dpi.  
Double-click this icon.  
The SmarThru Office window opens.  
Tool bar  
Working area  
Send to bar  
Tool bar: Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate  
the certain functions such as Scan Search, etc.  
,
27  
Scanning  
       
•Working area  
4
Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window.  
-
SmarThru Desktop: Created within the standard  
Adjust the scan settings.  
Windows folder My Documents.  
-
Sort on Disk: Files of the folders which are not  
indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk  
section. Sort type are Date, File Types, Latest Used.  
To add a folder for indexing, press Edit menu  
Preferences Index  
.
It may take longer time to show the added file folders  
according to the computer performance and the  
number of added file folders.  
NOTE  
:
To do indexing and searching the PDF format file, you must  
install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0.5 or higher.  
• You can use indexing and searching functions using  
SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service.  
This service is supported in Windows 2000 or above.  
Click to start scanning.  
NOTE  
:
-
Windows Folders: Allow user to navigate through all  
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru  
Office launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to  
open the Scan Setting window easily.  
the user’s files and folders.  
- The right panel: Reflects the content of a selected  
folder.  
Send to bar: Run the corresponding application directly.  
Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate  
application button.  
• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the  
-
Send by E-mail: To send documents by E-mail while  
working within the SmarThru Office  
To send scanned images or documents by e-mail, you  
must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express,  
which has been set up with your e-mail account.  
SmarThru icon  
in the tray area of the windows taskbar  
.
to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
-
-
Send by FTP: To upload a document file to server  
while working within the SmarThru Office  
.
Send by Fax: To send documents by Local or Network  
fax machine while working within the SmarThru  
Scan Setting lets you use the following services:  
Office  
.
Select Scanner: Select the Local or Network scanner.  
- Local Scan: After scanning with parallel port or USB  
port, you can store the scanned output in image or  
document file.  
- Network Scan: After scanning via network, you can  
store the scanned output in JPEG, TIFF, or pdf file.  
To use network scanner, your computer should install  
the Scan Manager and register the scanner within  
that program. Refer to Scanning chapter in user's  
guide.  
Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for  
Image type, Resolution, Scan Size, Paper Source.  
Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name,  
File Format, OCR Language.  
5
To start scanning, click Scan.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, click Cancel  
.
28  
Scanning  
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office  
Scanning Using the WIA Driver  
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all  
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard  
components provided by MicrosoftWindowsXP and works  
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver,  
the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images  
without using additional software.  
applications are closed on your computer.  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs  
.
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall  
SmarThru Office  
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the  
statement and click OK  
Click Finish  
.
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista with  
USB port.  
3
4
.
.
Windows XP  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
Using Onscreen Help File  
OR  
For more information about SmarThru, click  
at the top right  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
From the Start menu on your desktop window, select  
corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and  
allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru  
program.  
2
Settings  
,
Control Panel, and then Scanners and  
Cameras  
.
3
4
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and  
Camera Wizard launches.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see how your preferences affect the picture.  
Scanning Process with TWAIN-  
enabled Software  
5
6
Click Next.  
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and  
destination to save the picture.  
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it  
as your TWAIN source in the application you use.  
7
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it  
is copied to your computer.  
Windows Vista  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
2
3
Click Start  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
OR  
Scanners and Cameras  
.
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
Click on Scan a document or picture. Then Windows  
Fax and Scan application is opened automatically.  
3
4
5
Open an application, such as Photoshop.  
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
NOTE  
:
To view scanners, user can click on View scanners and  
cameras  
.
If there is not Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint  
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for  
acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the  
application.  
program and click From Scanner or Camera... on File menu.  
4
5
Click New Scan and then scan driver is opened.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see your preferences affect the picture.  
6
Click Scan.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel  
button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.  
29  
Scanning  
                 
NOTE:  
8
Using Smart Panel  
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the  
status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s  
settings. Smart Panel is installed automatically when you  
install the printer software.  
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung  
printer, first select the printer model you want in order to  
use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows  
or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and  
select your printer name  
.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this  
Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer  
or Operating System in use.  
NOTE:  
To use this program, you need:  
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the  
printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s)  
and various other information. You can also change settings.  
- Windows. To check for windows operating system(s) that  
are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer  
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher  
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with  
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer  
User’s Guide.  
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation  
in HTML Help.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
1
1
Toner Level  
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner  
cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s)  
shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in  
use. Any printers do not have this feature.  
Understanding Smart Panel  
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears  
automatically, showing the error.  
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the  
Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or  
Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status  
bar (in Mac OS X).  
Buy Now  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
You can view Help to solve problems.  
Double-click this icon in Windows.  
Printer Setting  
You can configure various printer settings in the Printer Settings  
Utility window. Any printers do not have this feature.  
NOTE: If you connect your printer to a network, the  
SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the  
Printer Settings Utility window.  
Click this icon in Mac OS X.  
Driver Setting (Only for Windows)  
Click this icon in Linux.  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need for using your  
If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select  
Programs or All Programs  
Smart Panel  
your printer driver name  
.
30  
Using Smart Panel  
     
Opening the Troubleshooting  
Guide  
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for  
error status problems.  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the  
Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide  
.
Using Printer Settings Utility  
Using the Printer Settings Utility, you can configure and check  
print settings.  
1
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the  
Smart Panel icon and select Printer Setting  
.
2
3
Change the settings.  
To send the changes to the printer, click the Apply button.  
NOTES: If your printer is connected to a network, the  
SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the  
Printer Settings Utility window.  
Using Onscreen Help File  
For more information about Printer Settings Utility, click  
.
Changing the Smart Panel Program  
Settings  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the  
Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you  
.
want from the Options window.  
31  
Using Smart Panel  
       
9
Using Your Printer in  
Linux  
Installing the Unified Linux  
Driver  
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.  
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your  
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.  
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
This chapter includes:  
2
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will  
automatically run.  
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal  
screen appears, type in:  
Getting Started  
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to  
mount is /mnt/cdrom,  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh  
The supplied CD-ROM provides you with Samsung’s Unified  
Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux  
computer.  
Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and  
scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and  
scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications  
for configuring your machine and further processing of the  
scanned documents.  
If you still failed to run the CD-ROM, type the followings  
in sequence:  
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver  
package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via  
fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.  
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you  
have an autorun software package installed and configured.  
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the  
same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,  
uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR  
system.  
4
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and  
flexible installation program. You don't need to search for  
additional components that might be necessary for the Unified  
Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto  
your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a  
wide set of the most popular Linux clones.  
32  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
           
5
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
2
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will  
automatically run.  
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal  
screen appears, type in:  
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to  
mount is /mnt/cdrom,  
The installation program has added the Unified Driver  
Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver  
group to the system menu for your convenience. If you  
have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is  
available through your system menu or can otherwise be  
called from the driver package windows applications,  
such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh  
Manager  
.
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you  
have an autorun software package installed and configured.  
NOTE: Installing the driver in the text mode:  
• If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the  
driver installation, you have to use the driver in the text  
mode.  
• Follow the step 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./  
install.sh, then follow the instruction on the terminal screen.  
Then the installation completes.  
3
4
Click Uninstall  
Click Next  
.
.
• When you wan to uninstall the driver, follow the installation  
instruction above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./  
uninstall.sh on the terminal screen.  
5
Click Finish.  
33  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
Using SetIP program  
Using the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC  
address which is the hardware serial number of the network  
printer card or interface. Especially, it is for the network  
administrator to set several network IPs at the same time.  
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for  
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device  
combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and  
scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option  
responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and  
scanner via a single I/O channel.  
You can only use SetIP program when your machine is  
connected to a network.  
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the  
printer driver installation.  
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
Starting the program  
1
Print the machine’s network information report which  
includes your machine’s MAC address.  
Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.  
Opening the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
2
3
Double click the SetIPApplet.html file.  
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the  
desktop.  
4
Click  
in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP  
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select  
Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver  
configuration window.  
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet  
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.  
5
Configurator  
.
2
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the  
corresponding configuration window.  
NOTE: when you enter the MAC address, enter it without  
colon(:).  
Printers Configuration button  
6
7
The machine prints the network information. Confirm all  
the settings are correct.  
Close the SetIP program.  
Scanners Configuration button  
Ports Configuration button  
34  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
       
Printers Configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes  
.
Printers Configuration button  
Ports Configuration button  
Printers Tab  
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by  
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified  
Driver Configurator window.  
Switches to Printer  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
installed printer.  
Shows the status,  
model name and  
URI of your printer.  
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help  
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the  
Unified Driver Configurator.  
.
3
You can use the following printer control buttons:  
Refresh: renews the available printers list.  
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.  
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.  
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default  
printer.  
Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.  
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the  
machine is working properly.  
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer  
properties. For details, see page 37.  
35  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
 
Classes Tab  
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.  
Ports Configuration  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check  
the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy  
state when its owner is terminated for any reason.  
Shows all of the  
printer classes.  
Switches to  
ports  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
available ports.  
Shows the status of the  
class and the number of  
printers in the class.  
Shows the port type,  
device connected to  
the port and status  
Refresh : Renews the classes list.  
Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.  
Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.  
Refresh : Renews the available ports list.  
Release port : Releases the selected port.  
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners  
Scanners Configuration  
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,  
view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device  
properties, and scan images.  
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the  
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more  
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to  
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these  
devices via the single I/O port.  
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an  
appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung  
printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices  
via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can  
be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing  
prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP  
device, while another block is in use.  
Switches to  
Scanners  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
installed scanners.  
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is  
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an  
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to  
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the  
most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP  
scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers  
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.  
Shows the vendor,  
model name and type  
of your scanner.  
Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties  
36  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
Configuring Printer Properties  
Printing a Document  
Using the properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your  
machine as a printer.  
Printing from Applications  
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to  
print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You  
can print on your machine from any such application.  
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
Select your machine on the available printers list and click  
2
3
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Properties  
.
The Printer Properties window opens.  
2
3
Select Print directly using lpr  
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your  
machine from the Printer list and click Properties  
.
.
Click.  
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the  
printer list in Printers configuration.  
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice  
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port  
in this tab.  
4
Change the printer and print job properties.  
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default  
device options.  
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to  
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed  
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click  
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or  
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the  
selected class.  
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer  
Properties Window.  
37  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
             
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.  
General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper  
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the  
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes  
the number of pages per sheet.  
Scanning a Document  
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator  
window.  
Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the  
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your  
desktop.  
text options, such as spacing or columns.  
Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used  
when printing images/files, such as color options, image  
size, or image position.  
2
3
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
Select the scanner on the list.  
Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper  
source, and destination.  
5
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties  
window.  
6
7
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the  
status of your print job.  
Click your  
scanner.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel  
.
Printing Files  
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung  
machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from  
the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do  
that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by  
a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
To print any document file:  
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command  
line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected  
to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on  
the list and is automatically selected.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select  
file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files  
If you have two or more scanners attached to your  
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any  
time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the  
first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the  
device options and start the image acquisition  
simultaneously.  
you want to print and click Open  
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,  
and change the printer and print job properties.  
.
2
3
For details about the properties window, see page 37.  
Click OK to start printing.  
4
5
Click Properties.  
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the  
document glass.  
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.  
38  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
         
The document is scanned and the image preview appears  
in the Preview Pane.  
10When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.  
11Select the file directory where you want to save the image  
and enter the file name.  
12Click Save.  
Adding Job Type Settings  
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later  
scanning.  
To save a new Job Type setting:  
1
2
3
4
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.  
Click Save As  
Enter the name for your setting.  
Click OK  
Drag the pointer to  
set the image area  
to be scanned.  
.
.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down  
list.  
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:  
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-  
down list.  
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan  
Area sections.  
2
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,  
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan  
job.  
Image Quality: allows you to select the color  
composition and the scan resolution for the image.  
To delete a Job Type setting:  
1
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The  
Advanced button enables you to set the page size  
manually.  
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
2
Click Delete  
.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,  
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about  
the preset Job Type settings, see page 39.  
The setting is deleted from the list  
You can restore the default setting for the scan options  
Using the Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu  
commands and tools to edit your scanned image.  
by clicking Default  
.
8
9
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.  
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window  
to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,  
click Cancel  
.
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager  
tab.  
Use these tools to  
edit the image.  
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.  
For further details about editing an image, see page 39.  
39  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
You can use the following tools to edit the image:  
Tools Function  
Saves the image.  
Cancels your last action.  
Restores the action you canceled.  
Allows you to scroll through the image.  
Crops the selected image area.  
Zooms the image out.  
Zooms the image in.  
Allows you to scale the image size; you can  
enter the size manually, or set the rate to  
scale proportionally, vertically, or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to rotate the image; you can  
select the number of degrees from the drop-  
down list.  
Allows you to flip the image vertically or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to adjust the brightness or  
contrast of the image, or to invert the  
image.  
Shows the properties of the image.  
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer  
to the onscreen help.  
40  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
9
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
10Select Typical installation for a local printer and then  
click OK  
.
10 Using Your Printer with  
a Macintosh  
.
NOTE: If you select Typical installation for a network  
installation is finished.  
Your printer supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB  
interface or 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When you  
print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the driver by  
installing the PPD file.  
11After the installation is finished, click Quit.  
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network  
interface. Make sure that your printer supports a  
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications  
in your Printer User’s Guide.  
NOTE  
:
• If you have installed scan driver, click Restart  
• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”  
.
This chapter includes:  
Uninstalling software  
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if  
installation fails.  
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.  
Turn on your computer and printer.  
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Installing Software  
The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the  
PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple  
LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a printer  
which supports the PostScript driver), for printing on a  
Macintosh computer.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click the Installer icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall  
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
10When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.  
.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a  
Macintosh computer.  
.
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.  
Turn on your computer and printer.  
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
.
4
5
6
7
8
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the Installer icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is  
.
.
recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual  
components to install.  
41  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
           
Using SetIP program  
Setting Up the Printer  
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC  
address which is the hardware serial number of the network  
printer card or interface. Especially, it is for the network  
administrator to set several network IPs at the same time.  
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which  
cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the  
network cable or the USB cable.  
You can only use SetIP program when your machine is  
connected to a network.  
For a Network-connected Macintosh  
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the  
printer driver installation.  
NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface.  
:
Before connecting your printer, make sure that your  
printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer  
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
NOTE: If you select Typical installation for a network  
printer during the printer driver installation, the SetIP  
program automatically runs after the installation. Follow the  
below instruction.  
1
2
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
1
2
The certificate window appears, click Trust.  
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the  
Utilities, and Print  
Print the machine’s network information report which  
includes your machine’s MAC address.  
.
3
4
Click  
in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP  
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
Click Add on the Printer List  
For MAC OS 10.5, press the “  
.
configuration window.  
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet  
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.  
3
4
.
+
” icon then a display  
window will pop up.  
For MAC OS 10.3, select the Rendezvous tab.  
NOTE: when you enter the MAC address, enter it without  
colon(:).  
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the  
Bonjour  
For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the Bonjour  
.
5
6
The machine prints the network information. Confirm all  
the settings are correct.  
Close the SetIP program.  
.
The name of your machine appears on the list. Select  
SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the  
xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.  
Starting the program  
If you want to change your network printer IP setting, follow  
the below instruction.  
5
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  
name in Model Name  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name  
in Model  
1
Print the machine’s network information report which  
includes your machine’s MAC address.  
.
2
Open the Library folder  
printer model name  
Printers  
Samsung  
Your  
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name  
SetIP  
.
3
4
Double click the SetIPApplet.html file.  
in Print Using  
.
The certificate window appears, click Trust  
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
5
Click  
in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP  
configuration window.  
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet  
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.  
6
Click Add.  
6
when you enter the MAC address, enter it without colon(:).  
7
8
The machine prints the network information. Confirm all  
the settings are correct.  
Close the SetIP program.  
42  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
       
For a USB-connected  
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
2
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the  
Utilities, and Print  
.
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
Click Add on the Printer List  
For MAC OS 10.5, press the “  
.
3
4
.
+
” icon then a display  
window will pop up.  
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.  
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the  
USB connection.  
For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the USB  
connection.  
5
6
Select your printer name.  
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  
name in Model Name  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name  
in Model  
.
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name  
in Print Using  
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
7
Click Add.  
43  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
 
Changing Printer Settings  
You can use advanced printing features when using your  
printer.  
Printing  
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties  
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for  
the name, the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
NOTE  
:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in  
this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
NOTE: The setting options may differ depending on printers  
and Macintosh OS version.  
Layout  
Printing a Document  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on  
one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-  
down list to access the following features.  
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer  
software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps  
to print from a Macintosh.  
1
2
3
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want  
to print.  
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document  
Setup in some applications).  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other  
options and click OK  
.
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
S
Mac OS 10.4  
Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many  
pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing  
Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next  
column.  
Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction  
on a page as like the examples on UI.  
S
Mac OS 10.3  
4
5
Open the File menu and click Print  
.
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which  
pages you want to print.  
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.  
44  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
           
Graphics  
Printer Features  
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting  
Resolution(Quality) and Color Mode. Select Graphics  
form the Presets' drop-down list to access the graphic  
features.  
This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and  
adjusting print quality. Select Printer Features from the  
Presets' drop-down list to access the following features:  
S
Mac OS 10.4  
Reverse Duplex Printing: Allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option  
does not appear, your printer does not have this  
feature.  
S
Mac OS 10.4  
Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print  
job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital  
document size. This can be useful when you want to  
check fine details on a small document.  
Resolution(Quality): You can select the printing  
resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity  
of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting  
also may increase the time it takes to print a document.  
RGB Color: This setting determines how colors are  
rendered. Standard is the most widely used setting  
which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of  
standard monitor (sRGB Monitor). Vivid mode is  
appropriate for printing presentation data and charts.  
The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color  
images than that of Standard mode. Device mode is best  
used for printing fine lines, small characters and color  
drawings. The color tone of Device mode may be  
different from that of monitor, the pure toner colors are  
used for printing Cyan, Magenta and Yellow colors.  
Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to  
Color typically produces the best possible print quality  
for color documents. If you want to print a color  
document in grayscale, select Grayscale  
.
Paper  
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray  
from which you want to print. This will let you get the best  
quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,  
select the corresponding paper type.  
S
Mac OS 10.4  
45  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
of Paper  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.  
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.  
Duplex Printing  
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the  
duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your  
finished document. The binding options are:  
Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout  
used in book binding.  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with  
calendars.  
Select Layout  
.
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Select the Layout  
.
Mac OS 10.3  
3
4
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet  
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.  
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.  
Mac OS 10.3  
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select  
the option you want from the Border drop-down list.  
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of  
pages on one side of each page.  
3
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing  
option.  
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the  
paper.  
5
4
CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and  
:
then try to print multiple copies of a document, the  
printer may not print the document in the way you  
want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has  
odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first  
page of the next copy will be printed on the front and  
back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the  
same page will be printed on the front and back of one  
sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a  
document and you want those copies on both sides of  
the paper, you must print them one at a time, as  
separate print jobs  
.
46  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
   
For MAC OS X 10.5:  
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside  
Scanning  
your machine in Bonjour Devices  
.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the MAC OS X  
10.4 procedure above.  
You can scan docoments using Image Capture program.  
Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program.  
6
7
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
Scanning with USB  
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
NOTE  
:
• If you want to scan via the DADF, use TWAIN-comliant  
softwares.  
• For more information about using Image Capture, please  
refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as  
Adobe Photoshop.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).  
Start Applications and click Image Capture  
.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant  
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message  
appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the  
problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.  
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update  
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates  
propery in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or  
higher.  
4
5
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
Setting scan information in Scan  
Manager.  
You can find out about Scan Manager program information  
and installed scan driver's condition. Also, you can change scan  
settings and add or delete the folders where scanned  
NOTE  
:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please  
refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
• If you want to scan via the DADF, use TWAIN-comliant  
softwares.  
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as  
Adobe Photoshop.  
documents to computer are save in Scan Manager program.  
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant  
1
2
Open Scan Manager in Smart Panel menu on Status  
bar.  
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.  
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update  
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates  
propery in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or  
higher.  
Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving  
destination and scan settings, add or delete application  
program and format files. You can change the scanning  
machine by using Change port. (Local or Network)  
3
Press OK after setting is done.  
Scanning with network  
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).  
3
4
5
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
Click Devices and click Browse Devices  
.
For MAC OS X 10.4:  
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure  
that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click  
Connect  
.
47  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
         
SOFTWARE SECTION  
INDEX  
installing  
Linux software 32  
overlay  
create 23  
A
advanced printing, use 19  
delete 23  
print 23  
L
B
Layout properties, set  
Windows 15  
booklet printing 20  
P
Linux  
Paper properties, set 16  
paper size, set 16  
paper source, set  
Windows 16  
paper tray, set  
copy 25  
poster, print 20  
PostScript driver  
installing 24  
driver, install 32  
orientation, print 38  
paper size, set  
print 38  
paper source, set 38  
paper type, set  
print 38  
print resolution 38  
printer properties 37  
printing 37  
resolution  
printing 38  
scanning 38  
C
canceling  
scan 29  
Color 17  
D
document, print  
Macintosh 44  
print  
document 14  
fit to page 21  
from Macintosh 44  
from Windows 14  
N-up  
Macintosh 46  
Windows 19  
overlay 23  
Windows 14  
double-sided printing 21  
E
M
Extras properties, set 17  
Macintosh  
driver  
PRN 14  
install 41, 42  
uninstall 41  
printing 44  
scaling 21  
F
watermark 22  
printer driver, install  
Linux 32  
printer properties  
Linux 37  
printer properties, set  
Macintosh 44  
Windows 15, 24  
printer resolution, set  
Windows 17  
printer software  
install  
favorites settings, use 18  
scanning 47  
setting up the printer 42  
MFP driver, install  
Linux 32  
G
Graphics 17  
Graphics properties, set 17  
N
H
n-up printing  
Macintosh 46  
Windows 19  
help, use 18, 24  
Macintosh 41  
I
Windows  
uninstall  
install  
O
Macintosh 41  
Windows 12  
printing  
printer driver  
Macintosh 41, 42  
orientation, print  
Windows 15  
Windows  
48  
booklets 20  
double-sided 21  
from Linux 37  
S
scanning  
Linux 38  
SmarThru 27  
TWAIN 29  
WIA driver 29  
scanning from Macintosh 47  
setting  
advanced option 17  
color mode 17  
darkness 17  
favorites 18  
resolution  
Windows 17  
software  
install  
Macintosh 41, 42  
Windows  
reinstall  
Windows 11  
system requirements  
Macintosh 41, 42  
uninstall  
Macintosh 41  
Windows 12  
status monitor, use 30  
T
TWAIN, scan 29  
U
uninstall, software  
Macintosh 41  
Windows 12  
uninstalling  
MFP driver  
Linux 33  
Using 22  
W
watermark  
create 22  
delete 22  
edit 22  
print 22  
WIA, scan 29  
49  

Sanyo Pnr Xs2432 User Manual
NEC NP PA571W User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics P500ymf C User Manual
Hampton Bay Wireless Doorbell User Manual
EMERSON RC212 User Manual
DIMPLEX LPC User Manual
DELL ULTRASHARP U2719DC 02 User Manual
DELL S2330MX User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 536.797470 User Manual
BLACK DECKER GCO1440 User Manual